PROGRAMA TEÓRICO Y PRÁCTICAS DE AULA, B BÁSICA

Tags: London, Programas, Oxford University Press, Oxford, Madrid, New York, Departamento Filolog, Cambridge University Press, American literature, Basil Blackwell, Longman, Lengua Extranjera, Harvester Press, Princeton University Press, HISTORIA DE LA LITERATURA, Diplomado en Ciencias Empresariales, Publicaciones de la Universidad de Zaragoza, Cornell University Press, University of Birmingham, English Phonetics, The New Princeton Encyclopedia of Poetry and Poetics, de la, Yale University Press, Linguistic Guide to English Poetry, Aula Virtual, Literary History, Cambridge History, History of Literature, Jack London, English Grammar, English Conversation, Practical English Usage, Ruiz de Mendoza, N. P. Y FRENZ, Sidney D. Braun, Comparative Literature, Johns Hopkins, F. Ruiz de Mendoza, Southern Illinois U. P.
Content: Programas 2010/2011
Asignaturas del curso 2010/2011
Pбg.
Ingenierнa Tйcnica Agrнcola Hortofruticultura y Jardinerнa.........................................................................3 1013009 INGLЙS TЙCNICO ......................................................................................................................................................................................................5
Ingenierнa Tйcnica Agrнcola Industrias Agrarias y Alimentarias .................................................................9 1023009 INGLЙS TЙCNICO ....................................................................................................................................................................................................11
Maestro Especialidad en Educaciуn Fнsica.................................................................................................. 15 1071004 DIDБCTICA DEL IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: INGLЙS .......................................................................................................................................................17 1071026 DIDБCTICA DEL IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: FRANCЙS....................................................................................................................................................19
Maestro Especialidad en Educaciуn Musical............................................................................................... 21 1081004 DIDБCTICA DEL IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: INGLЙS .......................................................................................................................................................23 1081029 DIDБCTICA DEL IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: FRANCЙS....................................................................................................................................................24
Maestro Especialidad en Lengua Extranjera (Inglйs)................................................................................25
1091005 1091013 1091020 1091022 1091025 1091026 1092001 1092003 1092005 1092006 1093001 1093002
IDIOMA EXTRANJERO I: INGLЙS ..............................................................................................................................................................................27 FONЙTICA DEL IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: INGLЙS........................................................................................................................................................28 MORFOSINTAXIS DEL IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: INGLЙS..............................................................................................................................................30 HISTORIA DE LA LITERATURA EXTRANJERA: INGLЙS..............................................................................................................................................31 DIDБCTICA DEL IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: INGLЙS .......................................................................................................................................................32 SEMБNTICA DEL IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: INGLЙS .....................................................................................................................................................34 IDIOMA EXTRANJERO II: INGLЙS .............................................................................................................................................................................36 IDIOMA EXTRANJERO III: INGLЙS ............................................................................................................................................................................38 ADQUISICIУN Y APRENDIZAJE DE UNA LENGUA EXTRANJERA: INGLЙS ..................................................................................................................40 LITERATURA INFANTIL EN IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: INGLЙS .....................................................................................................................................41 GRAMБTICA TEXTUAL DEL IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: INGLЙS ......................................................................................................................................43 CULTURA Y CIVILIZACIУN DEL PAНS EXTRANJERO: INGLЙS.....................................................................................................................................45
Diplomado en Ciencias Empresariales ........................................................................................................47 1103017 FRANCЙS EMPRESARIAL I ......................................................................................................................................................................................49 1103018 INGLЙS EMPRESARIAL I..........................................................................................................................................................................................51 1103020 INGLЙS EMPRESARIAL II.........................................................................................................................................................................................54
Maestro Especialidad en Lengua Extranjera (Francйs).............................................................................57
1111001 1111002 1111003 1111004 1111005 1111006 1112001 1112002 1112003 1112004
IDIOMA EXTRANJERO I: FRANCЙS...........................................................................................................................................................................59 MORFOSINTAXIS DEL IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: FRANCЙS ..........................................................................................................................................61 HISTORIA DE LA LITERATURA EXTRANJERA: FRANCЙS...........................................................................................................................................63 DIDБCTICA DEL IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: FRANCЙS....................................................................................................................................................65 SEMБNTICA DEL IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: FRANCЙS ..................................................................................................................................................66 FONЙTICA DEL IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: FRANCЙS.....................................................................................................................................................67 IDIOMA EXTRANJERO II: FRANCЙS..........................................................................................................................................................................68 IDIOMA EXTRANJERO III: FRANCЙS.........................................................................................................................................................................69 ADQUISICIУN Y APRENDIZAJE DE UNA LENGUA EXTRANJERA: FRANCЙS ...............................................................................................................70 LITERATURA INFANTIL EN IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: FRANCЙS ...................................................................................................................................71
Licenciado en Enologнa ................................................................................................................................73 2033009 FRANCЙS TЙCNICO .................................................................................................................................................................................................75
Licenciado en Filologнa Inglesa....................................................................................................................77
2051001 2051002 2051004 2051007 2051008
HISTORIA DE LA LITERATURA FRANCESA...............................................................................................................................................................79 LENGUA INGLESA I .................................................................................................................................................................................................81 LITERATURA INGLESA I ..........................................................................................................................................................................................82 LENGUA FRANCESA I ..............................................................................................................................................................................................85 LENGUA INGLESA II ................................................................................................................................................................................................86
1
2051010 LITERATURA INGLESA II .........................................................................................................................................................................................87 2051013 LENGUA INGLESA III ...............................................................................................................................................................................................89 2051014 LITERATURA INGLESA III.........................................................................................................................................................................................91 2051015 LENGUA INGLESA IV ...............................................................................................................................................................................................94 2051016 LITERATURA INGLESA IV ........................................................................................................................................................................................96 2051017 GRAMБTICA INGLESA I............................................................................................................................................................................................98 2051018 LITERATURA INGLESA V ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 100 2051019 HISTORIA DE LA LENGUA INGLESA I.................................................................................................................................................................... 102 2051021 GRAMБTICA INGLESA II........................................................................................................................................................................................ 104 2051022 LITERATURA INGLESA VI ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 105 2051023 HISTORIA DE LA LENGUA INGLESA II................................................................................................................................................................... 109 2051025 LITERATURA INGLESA VII .................................................................................................................................................................................... 111 2052001 LENGUA FRANCESA II .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 114 2052002 FONЙTICA INGLESA I ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 115 2052003 GЙNEROS Y RECURSOS LITERARIOS EN INGLЙS ................................................................................................................................................. 117 2052004 FONЙTICA INGLESA II .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 119 2052005 LINGЬНSTICA ANGLOAMERICANA.......................................................................................................................................................................... 121 2052006 LENGUA INGLESA V ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 122 2052007 COMENTARIO DE TEXTOS INGLESES I................................................................................................................................................................. 124 2052008 VARIEDADES DEL INGLЙS I ................................................................................................................................................................................. 126 2052009 PRБCTICAS DE MORFOSINTAXIS INGLESA ........................................................................................................................................................... 128 2052010 COMENTARIO FILOLУGICO DE TEXTOS ............................................................................................................................................................... 129 2052011 GRAMБTICA INGLESA III....................................................................................................................................................................................... 131 2052013 LINGЬНSTICA APLICADA INGLESA I....................................................................................................................................................................... 132 2052014 TEORНA DE LA TRADUCCIУN I (EN INGLЙS)......................................................................................................................................................... 134 2052015 GRAMБTICA INGLESA IV....................................................................................................................................................................................... 136 2052016 COMENTARIO DE TEXTOS INGLESES II................................................................................................................................................................ 138 2052017 LENGUA INGLESA VI ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 140 2052018 LINGЬНSTICA APLICADA INGLESA II...................................................................................................................................................................... 142 2052019 TEORНA DE LA TRADUCCIУN II (EN INGLЙS)........................................................................................................................................................ 144 2053006 INGLЙS CIENTНFICO-TЙCNICO............................................................................................................................................................................... 146 2053007 LITERATURA COMPARADA (INGLЙS-FRANCЙS) ................................................................................................................................................... 148 2053010 ANБLISIS DEL DISCURSO EN INGLЙS................................................................................................................................................................... 151 2053014 CINE ANGLONORTEAMERICANO .......................................................................................................................................................................... 152 2053015 HISTORIA DE LA LENGUA FRANCESA .................................................................................................................................................................. 155
Licenciado en Humanidades...................................................................................................................... 157
2061009 2061011 2061026 2061027 2062013 2062017
LENGUA FRANCESA I ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 159 HISTORIA DE LA LITERATURA FRANCESA............................................................................................................................................................ 160 LENGUA INGLESA I .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 162 HISTORIA DE LA LITERATURA INGLESA............................................................................................................................................................... 163 LENGUA FRANCESA II .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 165 LENGUA INGLESA II ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 166
Licenciado en Administraciуn y Direcciуn de Empresas .........................................................................167 2073010 FRANCЙS EMPRESARIAL I ................................................................................................................................................................................... 169 2073011 INGLЙS EMPRESARIAL I....................................................................................................................................................................................... 171
Licenciado en Filologнa Hispбnica.............................................................................................................. 175
2091004 2091005 2091006 2091007 2092003 2092004
LENGUA FRANCESA I ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 177 LENGUA INGLESA I .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 178 HISTORIA DE LA LITERATURA FRANCESA............................................................................................................................................................ 179 HISTORIA DE LA LITERATURA INGLESA............................................................................................................................................................... 181 LENGUA FRANCESA II .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 183 LENGUA INGLESA II ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 184
Asignaturas de Libre elecciуn.................................................................................................................... 185 8880037 INGLЙS JURНDICO I............................................................................................................................................................................................... 187 8880038 INGLЙS JURНDICO II .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 189 8880039 INTRODUCCIУN A LA TRADUCCIУN Y EDICIУN DE TEXTOS EN INGLЙS ESPECНFICO ............................................................................................ 191
2
Programas 2010/2011 101 Ingenierнa Tйcnica Agrнcola Hortofruticultura y Jardinerнa 3
Programas 2010/2011
1013009
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1013009 INGLЙS TЙCNICO
Titulaciуn Ingenierнa Tйcnica Agrнcola- Especialidad en Hortofruticultura y Jardinerнa
Tipo de Asignatura Op
Curso 1cl
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 1,5
Prбcticos Laboratorio 1,5
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ This course addresses the needs of students following the technical programmes offered by the University of La Rioja, and also the needs of students from humanity programmes who want to improve their technical English At the end of the course, students should be able to: -Understand information both implied and directly stated in the text. -Understand concepts. -Skim or scan to locate specific information. -Understand relations between parts of the text through the use of grammatical as well as lexical cohesion devices. -Distinguish the main ideas from supporting details. -Deduce meanings of new words from context. -Give their own definitions of words. -Rephrase sentences. -Use the correct prefixes, suffixes and noun phrases in word formation. -Write compositions and letters on prescribed topics. -Understand oral texts from a variety of sources (other students, DVDs, the internet, etc). __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ The readings studied in the "prбcticas de aula" will be related to the topics dealt with in each of the following theoretical units: INTRODUCTION UNIT 1 1.1 FIRST THINGS GO FIRST: NUMBERS AND CALCULATIONS 1.1.A Saying Numbers 1.1.B Calculating with Numbers 1.2 COMPOSITION TOPIC 1: GIVING OPINIONS UNIT 2 2.1 IF...THEN: LOGIC AND CONDITIONS 2.1.A Conditionals of the First Type 2.1.B Conditionals of the Second Type 2.1.C Conditionals of the Third Type 2.2 COMPOSITION TOPIC 1: EXPRESSING YOUR OPINIONS UNIT 3 3.1 MORE AND MOST: COMPARISONS IN TECHNICAL TEXTS 3.1.A Building Comparatives and Superlatives 3.1.B Using Comparatives and Superlatives 3.2 COMPOSITION TOPIC 2: WRITING A FORMAL LETTER
5
Programas 2010/2011 UNIT 4 4.1 LOOOONG WORDS: PREFIXES AND SUFFIXES IN SCIENTIFIC AND TECHNICAL TEXTS 4.1.A Prefixes in Scientific and Technical Texts 4.1.B Suffixes in Scientific and Technical Texts 4.2 COMPOSITION TOPIC 2: WRITING E-MAILS AND INFORMAL LETTERS UNIT 5 5.1 WHAT TO DO AND HOW TO DO IT: THE LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTIONS 5.1.A Giving Instructions 5.1.B Giving Reasons (and Consequences) of Instructions and Processes 5.2 COMPOSITION TOPIC 3: ORGANISING IDEAS UNIT 6 6.1 WHICH OR COMMA, WHICH: RELATIVES IN TECHNICAL DESCRIPTIONS AND DEFINITIONS 6.1.A Defining Relative Clauses 6.1.B Non-Defining Relative Clauses 6.2 COMPOSITION TOPIC 3: CONNECTING IDEAS __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__D__E__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__E__N__L_A__B_O__R__A_T__O__R_I_O__Y__C__A_M__P__O___________________________________ The following units pursue the development of oral and listening skills by means of a number of tasks based on audiovisual content. UNIT 0 Formula One and Technical English. UNIT 1 Listening to and trying to understand a PowerPoint presentation. UNIT 2 Growing tomatoes. UNIT 3 Following Steve Jobs in Apple. UNIT 4 Electromagnetism. UNIT 5 British International Motor Show. UNIT 6 Wine tasting (only "virtual"). __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ The final grade will be assessed by means of a final exam with questions which will cover content from both face-to-face classes and WebCT lessons. The exam will consist of a reading comprehension (belonging to the "prбcticas de aula": 25%), a listening comprehension exercise (including a new exercise, not seen in the "prбcticas de laboratorio" to which this part of the assignment belongs to: 25%). The theoretical part of the course (50% in all) --taught via WebCT-- will be assessed by means of: a) a rephrasing exercise (five phrases to rephrase, 1.5 points in all: 15% of the whole exam); b) a word- formation exercise (five words, 1 point in all: 10% of the whole exam); c) a composition exercise (25% of the whole course). 6
Programas 2010/2011 As for the listening comprehension (prбcticas de laboratorio), there will be 0.5 points for attending laboratory classes (5%): only the last five ones will be assigned 0.1 points each, and in the final exam the listening comprehension exercise will be worth 2 points. For those who have not attended ALL laboratory classes (unit 2 to 6), the exam listening comprehension will be worth 2.5 points (25%) __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Bates, M. and T. Dudley-Evans. 1996. General Science. Essex: Longman. Beigbeder Atienza, F. 1996. Diccionario tйcnico: inglйs-espaсol, espaсol-inglйs. Technical Dictionary: English- Spanish, Spanish-English. Madrid: Dнaz de Santos. Boeckner, K. and P. C. Brown. 2001. Oxford English for Computing. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Fernбndez y Suбrez, R. L. and M. J. de Teresa Paredes. 1993. English for Agroforestry Specialties. Inglйs para especialidades agroforestales. Madrid: Sнntesis. Glendinning, E. H. 1993. Oxford English for Electronics. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Glendinning, E. H. 1995. Oxford English for Electrical and Mechanical Engineering. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Hall, E. J. 1977. The Language of Electrical and Electronic Engineering in English. New York: Regents. Humby, E. and P. B. Robinson. 1982. Computer Applications. 1982. London: Cassell. Johnson, C. M. and D. 1992. General Engineering. London: Prentice Hall International. Mountford, A. 1997. English in Agriculture. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Swan, M. 1995. Practical English Usage. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Yates, C. St. J. and A. Fitzpatrick. 1997. Technical English for Industry. Essex: Longman. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Josй Dнaz-Cuestay Francisco Santibбсez Sбenz [email protected] [email protected] 7
Programas 2010/2011 0 102 Ingenierнa Tйcnica Agrнcola Industrias Agrarias y Alimentarias 9
Programas 2010/2011
1023009
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1023009 INGLЙS TЙCNICO
Titulaciуn Ingenierнa Tйcnica Agrнcola- Especialidad en Industrias Agrarias y Alimentarias
Tipo de Asignatura Op
Curso 1cl
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 1,5
Prбcticos Laboratorio 1,5
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ This course addresses the needs of students following the technical programmes offered by the University of La Rioja, and also the needs of students from humanity programmes who want to improve their technical English At the end of the course, students should be able to: -Understand information both implied and directly stated in the text. -Understand concepts. -Skim or scan to locate specific information. -Understand relations between parts of the text through the use of grammatical as well as lexical cohesion devices. -Distinguish the main ideas from supporting details. -Deduce meanings of new words from context. -Give their own definitions of words. -Rephrase sentences. -Use the correct prefixes, suffixes and noun phrases in word formation. -Write compositions and letters on prescribed topics. -Understand oral texts from a variety of sources (other students, DVDs, the internet, etc). __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ The readings studied in the "prбcticas de aula" will be related to the topics dealt with in each of the following theoretical units: INTRODUCTION UNIT 1 1.1 FIRST THINGS GO FIRST: NUMBERS AND CALCULATIONS 1.1.A Saying Numbers 1.1.B Calculating with Numbers 1.2 COMPOSITION TOPIC 1: GIVING OPINIONS UNIT 2 2.1 IF...THEN: LOGIC AND CONDITIONS 2.1.A Conditionals of the First Type 2.1.B Conditionals of the Second Type 2.1.C Conditionals of the Third Type 2.2 COMPOSITION TOPIC 1: EXPRESSING YOUR OPINIONS UNIT 3 3.1 MORE AND MOST: COMPARISONS IN TECHNICAL TEXTS 3.1.A Building Comparatives and Superlatives 3.1.B Using Comparatives and Superlatives 3.2 COMPOSITION TOPIC 2: WRITING A FORMAL LETTER
11
Programas 2010/2011 UNIT 4 4.1 LOOOONG WORDS: PREFIXES AND SUFFIXES IN SCIENTIFIC AND TECHNICAL TEXTS 4.1.A Prefixes in Scientific and Technical Texts 4.1.B Suffixes in Scientific and Technical Texts 4.2 COMPOSITION TOPIC 2: WRITING E-MAILS AND INFORMAL LETTERS UNIT 5 5.1 WHAT TO DO AND HOW TO DO IT: THE LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTIONS 5.1.A Giving Instructions 5.1.B Giving Reasons (and Consequences) of Instructions and Processes 5.2 COMPOSITION TOPIC 3: ORGANISING IDEAS UNIT 6 6.1 WHICH OR COMMA, WHICH: RELATIVES IN TECHNICAL DESCRIPTIONS AND DEFINITIONS 6.1.A Defining Relative Clauses 6.1.B Non-Defining Relative Clauses 6.2 COMPOSITION TOPIC 3: CONNECTING IDEAS __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__D__E__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__E__N__L_A__B_O__R__A_T__O__R_I_O__Y__C__A_M__P__O___________________________________ The following units pursue the development of oral and listening skills by means of a number of tasks based on audiovisual content. UNIT 0 Formula One and Technical English. UNIT 1 Listening to and trying to understand a PowerPoint presentation. UNIT 2 Growing tomatoes. UNIT 3 Following Steve Jobs in Apple. UNIT 4 Electromagnetism. UNIT 5 British International Motor Show. UNIT 6 Wine tasting (only "virtual"). __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ The final grade will be assessed by means of a final exam with questions which will cover content from both face-to-face classes and WebCT lessons. The exam will consist of a reading comprehension (belonging to the "prбcticas de aula": 25%), a listening comprehension exercise (including a new exercise, not seen in the "prбcticas de laboratorio" to which this part of the assignment belongs to: 25%). The theoretical part of the course (50% in all) --taught via WebCT-- will be assessed by means of: a) a rephrasing exercise (five phrases to rephrase, 1.5 points in all: 15% of the whole exam); b) a word- formation exercise (five words, 1 point in all: 10% of the whole exam); c) a composition exercise (25% of the whole course). 12
Programas 2010/2011
As for the listening comprehension (prбcticas de laboratorio), there will be 0.5 points for attending laboratory classes (5%): only the last five ones will be assigned 0.1 points each, and in the final exam the listening comprehension exercise will be worth 2 points. For those who have not attended ALL laboratory classes (unit 2 to 6), the exam listening comprehension will be worth 2.5 points (25%)
__B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Bates, M. and T. Dudley-Evans. 1996. General Science. Essex: Longman. Beigbeder Atienza, F. 1996. Diccionario tйcnico: inglйs-espaсol, espaсol-inglйs. Technical Dictionary: English- Spanish, Spanish-English. Madrid: Dнaz de Santos. Boeckner, K. and P. C. Brown. 2001. Oxford English for Computing. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Fernбndez y Suбrez, R. L. and M. J. de Teresa Paredes. 1993. English for Agroforestry Specialties. Inglйs para especialidades agroforestales. Madrid: Sнntesis. Glendinning, E. H. 1993. Oxford English for Electronics. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Glendinning, E. H. 1995. Oxford English for Electrical and Mechanical Engineering. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Hall, E. J. 1977. The Language of Electrical and Electronic Engineering in English. New York: Regents. Humby, E. and P. B. Robinson. 1982. Computer Applications. 1982. London: Cassell. Johnson, C. M. and D. 1992. General Engineering. London: Prentice Hall International. Mountford, A. 1997. English in Agriculture. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Swan, M. 1995. Practical English Usage. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Yates, C. St. J. and A. Fitzpatrick. 1997. Technical English for Industry. Essex: Longman.
Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Josй Dнaz-Cuesta
Francisco Santibбсez Sбenz
[email protected] [email protected]
13
Programas 2010/2011 107 Maestro Especialidad en Educaciуn Fнsica 15
Programas 2010/2011
1071004
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1071004 DIDБCTICA DEL IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: INGLЙS
Titulaciуn Maestro-Especialidad en Educaciуn Fнsica
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 1
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 4
Teуricos 2,5
Prбcticos Aula 1,5
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ -Aprender a enseсar inglйs en la escuela. -Conocer tйcnicas, recursos y materiales que ayudan en la enseсanza del inglйs. -Conocer los estadios en el aprendizaje y utilizar actividades que permitan la prбctica y refuerzo de las cuatro destrezas (listening, reading, speaking y writing) en inglйs. -Conocer las tйcnicas de la enseсanza de la pronunciaciуn, vocabulario y gramбtica. -Conocer las caracterнsticas de los niсos y sus implicaciones en la enseсanza del inglйs. Saber utilizarlas para motivarles en el aprendizaje del inglйs. -Conocer tipos de evaluaciones para valorar el nivel de conocimiento del inglйs de un niсo -Conocimiento y uso de las distintas metodologнas existentes en la enseсanza del inglйs. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ -English language and literature. -Procedures and techniques: stories, poems, songs and games. -Resources and materials. -The oral skills: listening and speaking. -The written skills: reading and writing. -Teaching pronunciation, grammar and vocabulary. -Lesson planning. -Implications of the characteristics of young children for the teaching of English as a foreign language. -Classroom interaction. -Assessment. -Approaches and methods in language teaching. -The role of English in the Spanish educational system. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Un examen final de conocimientos teуricos de la asignatura. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ ALBURQUERQE, R. et al. 1990. En el aula de inglйs. Madrid: Longman. BESTARD MONROIG, J. y PЙREZ MARTНN, M.C. 1992. La didбctica de la lengua inglesa. Fundamentos lingьнsticos y metodolуgicos. Madrid: Ed. Sintesis. BREWSTER, J., ELLIS, G. and GIRARD, D. 1992. The Primary English Teachers Guide. Harmondsworth: Penguin. CAMERON, L. 2001. Teaching Languages to Young Learners. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. COLLIE, J. and SLATER, S. 1994. Literature in the Language Classroom. A Resource Book of Ideas and Activities. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. EDGE, J. 1994. Essentials of English Language Teaching. Londres: Longman. GARCНA ARREZA, M., SEGURA BБEZ, J.J. y ZAMORA LУPEZ, M.D. 1994. La lengua inglesa en educaciуn primaria. Mбlaga: Aljibe. HARMER, J. 1985. The Practice of English Language Teaching. Londres: Longman. HALLIWELL, S. 1992. Teaching English in the Primary Classroom. Harlow: Longman. HAYCRAFT, J. 1992. An Introduction to English Language Teaching. Harlow: Longman.
17
HEARN, I. y GARCЙS, A. 2003. Didбctica del Inglйs para Primaria. Madrid: Pearson Education. MADRID, D. y McLAREN, N. (Eds.). 2004. TEFL in Primary Education. Granada: Universidad de Granada. MOON, J. 2000. Children Learning English. Oxford: Macmillan. PHILLIPS, S. 1995. Young Learners. Oxford: Oxford University Press. REILLY, V. y WARD, S. 2000. Very Young Learners. Oxford: Oxford University Press. SLATTERY, M. y WILLIS, J. 2001. English for Primary Teachers. Oxford: Oxford University Press. TANNER, R. y GREEN, C. 1998. Tasks for Teacher Education. Harlow: Longman. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Francisco Santibбсez Sбenz. 18
Programas 2010/2011
1071026
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1071026 DIDБCTICA DEL IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: FRANCЙS
Titulaciуn Maestro-Especialidad en Educaciуn Fнsica
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 1
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 4
Teуricos 2,5
Prбcticos Aula 1,5
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ -Conocer teуrica y prбcticamente el manejo de destrezas orales y escritas para la enseсanza de una L.E. - Secuenciar materiales de francйs para el logro de una tarea en Primaria -Conocer los materiales que existen para la enseсanza del francйs en la Escuela, saber seleccionarlos y utilizarlos en aula de L.E. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ 1-Fundamentos de la Enseсanza/aprendizaje de una L.E. en el aula de Infantil y Primaria 2.- Enseсanza-aprendizaje de destrezas orales. 3.- Enseсanza-aprendizaje de destrezas escritas. 4.- Anбlisis y propuesta de materiales de francйs para Primaria. 5.-Diseсo y secuenciaciуn de actividades para el logro de tareas en el aula. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Examen escrito de los contenidos teуrico-prбcticos de la asignatura El alumno tendrб que saber proponer o resolver tareas para la clase de Francйs en Primaria justificando su propuesta o su resoluciуn. En la propuesta de actividades o resoluciуn de tareas se utilizarб el francйs. Aunque la justificaciуn se podrб realizar en espaсol __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ -MANUALES DE FRANCЙS PARA PRIMARIA. -MATERIALES DE FRANCЙS EN PRIMARIA -SANCHEZ QUINTANA (1995): Las cuatro destrezas, Madrid, S.M. - V.V.A.A. (1998): Tareas: Colecciуn de materiales didбcticos mediante tareas, Barcelona, Difusiуn. - CUQ, J.F. et GRUCA, I. (2003): Cours de didactique du franзais L.E. et Seconde. Grenoble, Presse Universitaires de Grenoble. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ. Luz Oyуn Baсales
19
Programas 2010/2011 108 Maestro Especialidad en Educaciуn Musical 21
Programas 2010/2011
1081004
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1081004 DIDБCTICA DEL IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: INGLЙS
Titulaciуn Maestro-Especialidad en Educaciуn Musical
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 1
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 4
Teуricos 2,5
Prбcticos Aula 1,5
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ Enseсar a enseсar inglйs en la escuela. Conocer tйcnicas, recursos y materiales que ayudan en la enseсanza del inglйs. Conocer las caracterнsticas y utilizar actividades que permitan la prбctica y refuerzo destrezas (listening, reading, speakind and writing) en inglйs. Conocer las tйcnicas de la enseсanza de la pronunciaciуn, vocabulario y gramбtica. Conocer las caracterнsticas de los niсos y sus implicaciones en la enseсanza del inglйs para motivarles en el aprendizaje del inglйs. Conocer tipos de evaluaciones para valorar el nivel de conocimientos de inglйs de un niсo. Conocimiento y uso de las distintas metodologнas existentes en la enseсanza del inglйs. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ -English Language and English Literatura. -Stories, Poems, Songs and Games. -Resources and Materials. -The Four Skills: Listening and Speaking (Oral Skills) and Reading and Writing (Written Skills). -Techniques for Teaching of Pronunciation, Grammar and Vocabulary in English. -Lesson Planning. -Implications of the Characteristics of the Young Children for the Teaching of English as a Foreign Language. -Classroom Interaction. -Assessment. -Approaches and Methods in Language Teaching. -The Role of English in the Spanish Educational System. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Examen final __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ -BESTARD MONROIG, Juan y PЙREZ MARTНN, Marнa Concepciуn. 1992. La didбctica de la lengua inglesa. Fundamentos lingьнsticos y metodolуgicos. Madrid: Ed. Sintesis. -ALBURQUERQE. 1990. En el aula de inglйs. Madrid: Longman. -BREWSTER, Jean. ELLIS, Gail and GIRARD, Denis. 1992. The Primary English Teachers Guide. Harmondsworth: Penguin. -COLLIE, Joanne and SLATER, Stephen. 1994. Literature in the Language Classroom. A Resource Book of Ideas and Activities. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. -EDGE, Julian. 1994. Essentials of English Language Teaching. London: Longman. -GARCНA ARREZAS, Miguel, SEGURA BAEZ, Joaquнn J. y ZAMORA LУPEZ, Marнa Dolores. 1994. La lengua inglesa en educaciуn primaria. Mбlaga: Aljibe. -HARMER, Jeremy. 1985. The Practice of English Language Teaching. London: Longman. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ. Pilar Agustнn LLach
23
Programas 2010/2011
1081029
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1081029 DIDБCTICA DEL IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: FRANCЙS
Titulaciуn Maestro-Especialidad en Educaciуn Musical
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 1
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 4
Teуricos 2,5
Prбcticos Aula 1,5
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ -Conocer teуrica y prбcticamente el manejo de destrezas orales y escritas para la enseсanza de una L.E. - Secuenciar materiales de francйs para el logro de una tarea en Primaria -Conocer los materiales que existen para la enseсanza del francйs en la Escuela, saber seleccionarlos y utilizarlos en aula de L.E. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ 1-Fundamentos de la Enseсanza/aprendizaje de una L.E. en el aula de Infantil y Primaria 2.- Enseсanza-aprendizaje de destrezas orales. 3.- Enseсanza-aprendizaje de destrezas escritas. 4.- Anбlisis y propuesta de materiales de francйs para Primaria. 5.-Diseсo y secuenciaciуn de actividades para el logro de tareas en el aula. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Examen escrito de los contenidos teуrico-prбcticos de la asignatura El alumno tendrб que saber proponer o resolver tareas para la clase de Francйs en Primaria justificando su propuesta o su resoluciуn. En la propuesta de actividades o resoluciуn de tareas se utilizarб el francйs. Aunque la justificaciуn se podrб realizar en espaсol __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ -MANUALES DE FRANCЙS PARA PRIMARIA -MATERIALES DE FRANCЙS EN PRIMARIA -SANCHEZ QUINTANA (1995): Las cuatro destrezas, Madrid, S.M. - V.V.A.A. (1998): Tareas: Colecciуn de materiales didбcticos mediante tareas, Barcelona, Difusiуn - CUQ, J.F. et GRUCA, I. (2003): Cours de didactique du franзais L.E. et Seconde. Grenoble, Presse Universitaires de Grenoble. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ. Luz Oyуn Baсales
24
Programas 2010/2011 109 Maestro Especialidad en Lengua Extranjera (Inglйs) 25
Programas 2010/2011
1091005
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1091005 IDIOMA EXTRANJERO I: INGLЙS
Titulaciуn Maestro-Especialidad en Lengua Extranjera (Inglйs)
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 1
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ - Un buen nivel de lengua inglesa en sus cuatro destrezas: comprender, hablar, leer y escribir. - Un buen nivel de vocabulario y gramбtica. - Ser capaz de usar el inglйs en diversas situaciones y funciones con un nivel aceptable de correcciуn. Objetivo particular: -Dominio de la lengua inglesa en el nivel del First Certificate English. El alumno deberб comunicarse con correcciуn y fluidez en el nivel que suele denominarse Intermediate o superior. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O__________________________________________________________________________ El temario consistirб en las Unidades 1 a 7, incluidas, del libro de texto: NEW FIRST CERTIFICATE GOLD COURSEBOOK by Jacky Newbrook, Judith Wilson and Richard Acklam __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ 1) Examen final escrito y oral. El examen oral hace nota media con el escrito. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Libro de texto: NEW FIRST CERTIFICATE GOLD COURSEBOOK by Jacky Newbrook, Judith Wilson and Richard Ackam. Essex: Pearson Education Limited, Longman, aсo 2004. - VINCE, M. (1996) First Certificate Language Practice. Oxford: MacMillan / Heinemann. Este libro consta de explicaciones breves y de ejercicios prбcticos de gramбtica. Muy recomendable para autoaprendizaje usando la ediciуn con Soluciones ( indicado en la cubierta: WITH KEY). - GREENBAUM, S. & QUIRK, R. (1990) A Students Grammar of the English Language. London: Longman. Trata con precisiуn y rigor los puntos esenciales de la gramбtica; no es muy extensa. - QUIRK, R., GREENBAUM, S., LEECH, G & SVARTVIK, J. (1985 ) A Comprehensive Grammar of the English Language. London: Longman. Una de las mejores gramбticas del inglйs, si no la mejor. Muy extensa. Trata con extensiуn y profundidad cada uno de los puntos gramaticales Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Roberto Torre Alonso.
27
Programas 2010/2011
1091013
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1091013 FONЙTICA DEL IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: INGLЙS
Titulaciуn Maestro-Especialidad en Lengua Extranjera (Inglйs)
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 1
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula
Prбcticos Laboratorio 3
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ Adquirir unos conocimientos bбsicos de fonйtica inglesa: Conocer los уrganos del habla y los factores fundamentales en la producciуn del sonido Conocer el sistema vocбlico y consonбntico inglйs Conocer los aspectos bбsicos del "connected speech" Conocer el acento en la palabra y en la oraciуn como base del ritmo en inglйs Conocer los tipos de entonaciуn y su valor comunicativo __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ 1. Introduction: English Phonetics and Teaching Pronunciation 2. The Speech Mechanism. 3. Description and Classification of Speech Sounds. 4. The English Pure Vowels. 5. The English Diphthongs and Triphthongs 6. The English Consonants (I): Plosives 7. The English Consonants (II): Fricatives and Affricates 8. The English Consonants (III): Nasals, Laterals and Approximants 9. Stress in Simple and Complex Words 10. Strong and Weak Syllables. 11. Aspects of Connected Speech: Weak Forms, Linking, Elision, Assimilation. 12. Rhythm 13. Intonation __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__D__E__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__E__N__L_A__B_O__R__A_T__O__R_I_O__Y__C__A_M__P__O___________________________________ No habrб.
__S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Examen final que consistirб en: - Preguntas teуricas: 50% - Transcripciуn fonйtica: 50% __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ - GIMSON, A.C. 1975. A Practical Course of English Pronunciation: a Perceptual Approach. London: Edward Arnold - ROACH, Peter. 2007. English Phonetics and Phonology. A Practical Course. Cambridge: C.U.P - WELLS, J.C. Longman Pronunciation Dictionary. Longman
__B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__C__O_M__P__L_E_M__E__N_T__A_R__I_A___________________________________________________________ ALCARAZ, E. & MOODY, B. 1984. Fonйtica inglesa para espaсoles. Alcoy; Marfil ARNOLD, G.F. & TOOLEY, O.M. 1971-73. Say It with Rhythm. London: Longman ASHBY, P. 2005. Speech Sounds. London: Routledge
28
Programas 2010/2011 AUER, P.E. , COUPER-KUHLEN & MULLER F. 1999. Language in Time: The Rhythm and Tempo of Spoken Interaction. Oxford: Oxford University Press BAKER, A.1982. Tree or Three? An Elementary Pronunciation Course. London; Cambridge University Press BAKER, A. 1983. Ship or Sheep? An Intermediate pronunciation Course. London; Cambridge University Press BAUMAN-WДNGLER, J.A. 2009.Introduction to Phonetics and Phonology: from Concepts to Transcription. Boston: Pearson BOLINGER, D. 1986. Intonation and Its Parts: Melody in Spoken English. Stanford: Stanford University Press BRADFORD, B. 1988. Intonation in Context. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press BRAZIL, D. 1985. The Communicative Value of Intonation in English. ELR: University of Birmingham BRAZIL, D. 1994. Pronunciation for Advanced Learners of English. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press CARR, P. 2008. English Phonetics and Phonology: an Introduction. Malden: Blackwell. COLLINS, B. 2008. Practical Phonetics and Phonology: a Resource Book for Students. London, N.Y.: Routledge CRUITTENDEN, A. 1991. Intonation. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press FINCH, Diana F. & ORTIZ LIRA, Hйctor. 1982. A Course in English Phonetics for Spanish Speakers. London: Heinemann GIBBON, D. & RITCHER, H. Eds. 1984. Intonation, Accent and Rhythm: Studies in Discourse Phonology. Berlin: Walter and Gruyter GIEGERICH, Heinz J. 1995. English Phonology. An Introduction. Cambridge: C.U.P GIMSON, A.C. 1975. A Practical Course of English Pronunciation: a Perceptual Approach. London: Edward Arnold HILL, L.A: 1970. Stress and Intonation Step by Step: Workbook. Oxford: Oxford University Press KELLLY, G. 1999. How to Teach Pronunciation. London; Longman KENWORTHY, J. 2000. Teaching English Pronunciation. London; Longman KNOWLES, G: 1987. Patterns of Spoken English. London: Longman KREIDLER, Charles W. 1995. The Pronunciation of English. A course book in Phonology. Oxford: Blackwell LADEFOGET, P. 2006. A Course in Phonetics. Boston: Thomson MACMAHON, A. 2008. An Introduction to English Phonology. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press O'CONNOR, J.D. 1979. Stress, Rhythm and Intonation. Madrid: Alhambra O'CONNOR, J.D. 1979. Better English Pronunciation. London; Cambridge University Press SБNCHEZ BENEDITO, F. 2001. Manual de pronunciaciуn inglesa comparada con la espaсola. Granada; Comares SPENCER, Andrew. 1996. Phonology. Theory and Description. Oxford: Blackwell TENCH, P. 1990. The Roles of Intonation in English Discourse. Frankfurt and Main: Peter Lang TENCH, P. 1996. The Intonation Systems of English. London: Cassell Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Cristina Flores Moreno / Francisco Santibбсez Sбenz 29
Programas 2010/2011
1091020
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1091020 MORFOSINTAXIS DEL IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: INGLЙS
Titulaciуn Maestro-Especialidad en Lengua Extranjera (Inglйs)
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 2
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Teуricos 4,5
Prбcticos Aula 1,5
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ This course intends to provide students with the knowledge about the most important rules of English grammar from a theoretical and a practical perspective. This course also aims to develop in future teachers a deep knowledge of the structures that govern the English language. A teacher needs to know how to use the language in practice and how to give explanations about the language. After this course the student should be able to manipulate correctly English structures, identify and correct grammatical errors in written texts and be more fluent in English. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ 1. Some basic notions and key concepts: linguistics, morphology, syntax. 2. Morphemes and words. 3. Nouns: the noun phrase. 4. Verbs: the verb phrase. 5. Adjectives: the adjectival phrase. 6. Adverbs: the adverbial phrase. 7. Function words: the prepositional phrase 8. Clauses and sentences in English __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ A final exam consisting of theoretical and practical exercises will be the tool for evaluation and assessment of the accomplishment of the objectives of the course. A selection of theoretical and practical resources will be uploaded to the Campus virtual at the beginning of the semester: http://www.campusvirtual.unirioja.es. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ - Aarts, Bas, 2001 (2nd ed.), English Syntax and Argumentation, Basingstoke, Palgrave. - Aronoff, Mark & Kirsten Fudeman, 2005, What is Morphology? Oxford, Blackwell. - Downing, Angela & Philip Locke, 1992, A University Course in English Grammar, Hertfordshire, Prentice Hall. - Carnie, Andrew, 2002, Syntax : a Generative Introduction. Oxford, Blackwell. - Greenbaum, Sidney & Randolph Quirk, 1990, A Student's Grammar of the English Language, Essex, Longman. - Huddleston, Rodney, 1984, Introduction to the Grammar of English, Cambridge, Cambridge University Press. - Radford, Andrew, 2009, Analysing English Sentences, Cambridge, Cambridge University Press. - Radford, Andrew, 1997, Syntactic Theory and the Structure of English, Cambridge, Cambridge University Press. - Weisler, Steven E. & Slavko Milekic, 2000, Theory of Language, Cambridge, M.I.T. - Yule, George, 1985, The Study of Language, Cambridge, Cambridge University Press. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Andrйs Canga Alonso.
30
Programas 2010/2011
1091022
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1091022 HISTORIA DE LA LITERATURA EXTRANJERA: INGLЙS
Titulaciуn Maestro-Especialidad en Lengua Extranjera (Inglйs)
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 2
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ Ability to make up a synthesis and analysis of English Literature in its historical and literary contexts. A critical competence in the reading and commentary of selected literary texts. Aesthetic and literary appreciation of particular texts __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ 1. - Old English Period (660-1066). 2. - Middle English Period (1066-1485). 3. - Renaissance (1485- 1642). 4. - Commonwealth and Restoration (1642 - 1700) 5. - XVIII Century: Neoclassic Period (1700- 1789). 6. - The Romantic Period (1789 - 1832). 7.-The Victorian Period (1832 ­ 1900). 8. - The Twentieth Century (1900 - to the present.). __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Final written exam (100%). The exam will consist of two parts: Theory (50%) and Commentary and/or Identification of selected texts (50%) The exam must be performed with a level of English equivalent to "Idioma Extranjero: Inglйs II" __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ The Norton Anthology of English Literature ( two volumes, last edition ) The Routledge History of Literature in English: Britain and Ireland, by Ronald Carter & John Mc Rae.( last edition) ( Recommended textbook). NOTA IMPORTANTE: Dado que esta asignatura serб impartida de modo no presencial, se recomienda a todos los alumnos matriculados pasen por tutorнa a entregar su ficha e informarse adecuadamente sobre los contenidos del curso. Tanto la teorнa como los textos seleccionados se depositarбn en la biblioteca. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Carolina Taboada Ferrero
31
Programas 2010/2011
1091025
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1091025 DIDБCTICA DEL IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: INGLЙS
Titulaciуn Maestro-Especialidad en Lengua Extranjera (Inglйs)
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 3
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Teуricos 4,5
Prбcticos Aula 1,5
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ -Enseсar a enseсar inglйs en la escuela. -Diferenciar entre enseсar inglйs a niсos de primaria y de infantil. -Conocer tйcnicas, recursos y materiales que ayudan en la enseсanza del inglйs. -Conocer las caracterнsticas, estadios en el aprendizaje y utilizar actividades que permitan la prбctica y refuerzo de las cuatros destrezas (listening, reeading, speaking and writing) en inglйs. -Conocer las tйcnicas de la enseсanza de la pronunciaciуn, vocabulario y gramбtica asн como saber utilizar actividades que permitan la introducciуn, prбctica y refuerzo de la pronunciaciуn, vocabulario y gramбtica. -Saber planificar una unidad didбctica de inglйs en la escuela. -Conocer las caracterнsticas de los niсos y sus implicaciones en la enseсanza del inglйs. Saber utilizarlas para motivarles en el aprendizaje del inglйs. -Conocer la interacciуn que se puede dar en una clase de inglйs. -Conocer tipos de evaluaciones y ejemplos de actividades que le permiten al maestro valorar el nivel de conocimiento del inglйs de un niсo. -Conocimiento y uso de las distintas metodologнas existentes en la enseсanza del inglйs. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ -English language and English literature. -Procedures and techniques: stories, poems, songs and games. -Resources and Materials. -The oral skills: listening and speaking. -The written skills: reading and writing. -Teaching pronunciation, grammar and vocabulary. -Lesson planning. -Implications of the characteristics of the young children for the teaching of English as a foreign language. -Classroom interaction. -Assessment. -Approaches and methods in language teaching. -The role of English in the Spanish educational system. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Un examen de conocimientos teуricos de la asignatura. Una valoraciуn sobre las lecturas obligatorias de cada tema. Una valoraciуn de la habilidad del alumno en el planteamiento de una actividad de inglйs en la escuela y de su capacidad para comentarla didбcticamente. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ -ALBURQUERQUE. 1990. En el aula de inglйs. Madrid: Longman. -BESTARD MONROIG, Juan y PЙREZ MARTНN, Marнa Concepciуn. 1992. La didбctica de la lengua inglesa. Fundamentos lingьнsticos y metodolуgicos. Madrid: Ed. Sintesis. -BREWSTER, Jean. ELLIS, Gail and GIRARD, Denis. 1992. The Primary English Teachers Guide. Harmondsworth: Penguin.
32
Programas 2010/2011 -COLLIE, Joanne and SLATER, Stephen. 1994. Literature in the Language Classroom. A Resource Book of Ideas and Activities. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. -EDGE, Julian. 1994. Essentials of English Language Teaching. London: Longman. -GARCНA ARREZAS, Miguel, SEGURA BAEZ, Joaquнn J. y ZAMORA LУPEZ, Marнa Dolores. 1994. La lengua inglesa en educaciуn primaria. Mбlaga: Aljibe. -HARMER, Jeremy. 1985. The Practice of English Language Teaching. London: Longman. -HAYCRAFT, John. 1992. An Introduction to English Language Teaching. Harlow: Longman. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ. Asunciуn Barreras Gуmez 33
Programas 2010/2011
1091026
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1091026 SEMБNTICA DEL IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: INGLЙS
Titulaciуn Maestro-Especialidad en Lengua Extranjera (Inglйs)
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 3
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 3
Teуricos 1,5
Prбcticos Aula 1,5
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ The course is designed as introduction to semantics. It introduces students (prospective teachers of English) to the basic technical terminology, main currents and issues in the field. It also attempts to develop students' awareness on the different approaches to the analysis of word meaning, and on its pedagogical implications for teaching vocabulary in the classroom context. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ Unit 1.- Introduction: definition of Semantics, scope, key concepts and terminology Unit 2.- Words and meanings Unit 3.- Paradigmatic and syntagmatic relations Unit 4.- Categorization: the classical theory of categorization vs. prototype theory Unit 5.- Semantics of figurative language __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Students will be assessed throughout the whole course. Final marks will depend on: - Participation in the class - A compulsory oral presentation - A final exam. It is also a basic requirement to pass the subject that students express themselves in correct and fluent English, paying especial attention to the specific terminology of the subject. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Cruse, Alan. 2004. Meaning in Language. An Introduction to Semantics and Pragmatics. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Frawley, W.F. 1992. Linguistic Semantics. Hillsdale, New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates Publishers. Garcнa Murga, F. 2002. El significado. Una introducciуn a la semбntica. Munich: Lincom Europa. Goddard, C. 1998. Semantic Analysis. A Practical Introduction. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Gregory, Howard. 2000. Semantics. London: Routledge. Hatch, Evelyn & Cheryl Brown. 1995. Vocabulary, Semantics, and Language Education. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Hipkiss, Robert. 1995. Semantics. Defining the Discipline. Mahwah, New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, Publishers. Hudson, Richard. 1995. Word Meaning. London: Routledge. Jackson, Howard & Etienne Zй Amvela. 2000. Words, Meaning and Vocabulary. London: Cassell. Jackson, Howard 2002. Grammar and Vocabulary. A resource book for students. London: Routledge.
34
Programas 2010/2011 Kleiber, G. 1995. La semбntica de prototipos. Madrid: Visor. Kreidler, C. 1998. Introducing English Semantics. Routledge. Lakoff, G. 1987. Women, Fire, and Dangerous Things. What Categories Reveal about the Mind. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. Lakoff, G. and Johnson, M. 1980. Metaphors We Live By. Chicago: Chicago University Press. Lakoff, G. and Johnson, M. 1999. Philosophy in the Flesh. The Embodied Mind and its Challenge to Western Thought. New York: Basic Books. Leech, Geoffrey. 1981. Semantics. London: Penguin. Lцbner, Sebastian 2002. Understanding Semantics. London: Arnold. Lyons, J. 1995. Linguistic Semantics. An Introduction. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Palmer, F. R. 1993[1976]. Semantics. 2nd ed. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Saeed, J. 2001. Semantics. UK, USA: Blackwell. Ungerer, F. and Schmid, H. 1996. An Introduction to Cognitive Linguistics. London and New York: Longman. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ. Sandra Peсa Cervel 35
Programas 2010/2011
1092001
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1092001 IDIOMA EXTRANJERO II: INGLЙS
Titulaciуn Maestro-Especialidad en Lengua Extranjera (Inglйs)
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 2
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 1,5
Prбcticos Laboratorio 1,5
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ This course is designed for students who need to reach the standard required for the First Certificate in English Cambridge examination. It is therefore aimed at starting students off for the Advanced level in English examination. Emphasis is placed on communicative competence, fluency, vocabulary resource, grammatical accuracy and organization of composition. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ The theoretical and practical approach will be based on units 8-12 of the coursebook (see biliografнa below). This includes work on the following areas: a) Language, grammar and composition; b) Reading Comprehension; c) Use of English; d) Listening Comprehension and e) Oral interview. With respect to the following skills, students will have to meet certain standards in: fluency, grammatical accuracy, pronunciation, interactive communication and vocabulary resource. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__D__E__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__E__N__L_A__B_O__R__A_T__O__R_I_O__Y__C__A_M__P__O___________________________________ Students are expected to have fluency in conversation, role-play practice, telling stories and satisfactory comprehension of listening activities. Students will have to be able to express opinions on current issues. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ 1. A final exam (written and oral) (100%) a. The written part will consist of the following tasks: vocabulary, use of English and grammar exercises, composition (200-250 words), reading comprehension, listening comprehension and compulsory reading exercises b. The oral part will consist of an interview, which will be assessed according to vocabulary richness, fluency, pronunciation, grammar in use, intonation and interaction criteria. To complete the compulsory reading exercises of the exam, students will have to read Rebecca by Daphne du Maurier (London: Penguin, 2000). Important notice: Students must pass both the oral and the written parts of the exam (including the compulsory reading exercises section). The composition has to be passed independently from the other exam sections. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Coursebook: Acklam, Richard and Sally Burgess (2000) New First Certificate Gold Coursebook. London: Longman (Units 8-12) (libro azul) Eastwood, J. (1992): Oxford Practice Grammar, Oxford: Oxford University Press. Campos, M. A., A. Lillo & V. M. Pina. (2000): Grammar in Gobbets. Alicante: Aguaclara. Hewings, M. (1999): Advanced Grammar in Use. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Leech G. (1989): An A-Z of English Grammar & Usage. London: Arnold. ______ & J. Svartvik (1975): A Communicative Grammar of English. London: Longman. Murphy, R. (1994): English Grammar in Use, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Quirk, R. & S. Greenbaum (1973): A University Grammar in Use. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Swan, M. (1995): Practical English Usage, Oxford: Oxford University Press.
36
Programas 2010/2011 Thomson, A.J. & Martinet, A.V. (1989): A Practical English Grammar, Oxford: Oxford University Press. Vince, M. (1996) First Certificate Language Practice, Oxford; MacMillan. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Melania Terrazas Gallego. 37
Programas 2010/2011
1092003
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1092003 IDIOMA EXTRANJERO III: INGLЙS
Titulaciуn Maestro-Especialidad en Lengua Extranjera (Inglйs)
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 2
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ The aim of this course is to provide the magisterio student with comprehensive competence in listening, speaking, reading, and writing. At the end of this course the students should have gone well beyond the level required for the Cambridge First Certificate in English and should be able to perform at a level including many structures of Advanced English. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ The theoretical and practical approach will be based on units 1-8 of the course book Advanced of the Gold series by Richard Acklam and Sally Burgess. The students might be required to read a text and write a paper on it, and to give an in-class presentation on a variety of topics assigned by the teacher. The course book might be supplemented by material provided by the teacher such as newspapers, magazine articles, editorials, literary excerpts, etc. The work performed in class is all meant to augment the internalization of the English language and includes, among other things, the following variety of activities: role playing, debate, translation, reading comprehension, listening, summary, composition writing, grammar exercises, word-building exercises, pair-work, etc. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Students are expected to participate in class discussions and debates, and will be tested on oral presentations along the semester. At the end of the course there will be a final examination with most, or all, of the following components: listening comprehension, reading comprehension, composition, grammar exercises, vocabulary exercises, and oral interview if necessary. To achieve a passing grade in this examination each section should obtain at least the minimum passing score. The final course grade will consist of the average assessment of the following components: class participation; oral and written tasks completed during the course; and final exam. In order to pass the course, the minimum passing grade (5 points out of ten) should be achieved in the final written examination, as well as in the oral examination (and written tasks). __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Coursebooks: Acklam, Richard & Sally Burgess (2000) New Edition of the Advance Gold Coursebook. London: Longman. (Units 8-15). Hopkins, Andy & Jocelyn Potter eds. 1986. Detective Stories of Agatha Christie London: Longman. Reference Books: Eastwood, J. 1992. Oxford Practice Grammar, Oxford: Oxford University Press. Greenbaum, S. & R. Quirk, R. 1992. A Students Grammar of the English Language. London: Longman. Greenbaum, S. & R. Quirk. 1985. A Comprehensive Grammar of the English Language. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Hewings, M. 1999. Advanced Grammar in Use. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Leech, G. & J. Svartvik. 1995. A Communicative Grammar of English. London: Longman. Murphy, R. 1994. English Grammar in Use. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Swan, M.1995. Practical English Usage. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Thomson, A.J. & Martinet, A.V. 1989. A Practical English Grammar. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
38
Programas 2010/2011 Websters Third New International Dictionary. Chicago: Merriam Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Inmaculada Medina Barco 39
Programas 2010/2011
1092005
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1092005 ADQUISICIУN Y APRENDIZAJE DE UNA LENGUA EXTRANJERA: INGLЙS
Titulaciуn Maestro-Especialidad en Lengua Extranjera (Inglйs)
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 2
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 4
Teуricos 2,5
Prбcticos Aula 1,5
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ -Enseсar a enseсar inglйs en la escuela. -Conocer tйcnicas, recursos y materiales que ayudan en la enseсanza del inglйs. -Conocer los estadios en el aprendizaje y utilizar actividades que permitan la prбctica y refuerzo de las cuatro destrezas (listening, reading, speakind and writing) en inglйs. -Aproximaciуn a las tйcnicas de la enseсanza de la pronunciaciуn, vocabulario y gramбtica. -Conocer las caracterнsticas de los niсos y sus implicaciones en la enseсanza del inglйs. -Conocer tipos de evaluaciones y ejemplos de actividades que le permiten al maestro valorar el nivel de conocimiento del inglйs de un niсo. -Conocimiento y uso de las distintas metodologнas existentes en la enseсanza del inglйs. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ 1. Defining Basic terms: learning, acquisition, teaching, input, intake, output, etc. 2. Contexts of learning a foreing a second language. 3. Individual learning differences. 4. First language acquisition. 5. Comparing first and second language acquisition. 6. Theories of second language learning. 7. Error analysis and interlanguage. 8. Learning English in the classroom. The role of formal instruction. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Examen final __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ BROWN. 1987. Principles of Language Learning and Teaching. Englewood Cliffs (NJ): Prentice Hall Regents. DULAY et al. 1982. Language Two. New York: Oxford UP. ELLIS 1985. Understanding Second Language Acquisition. Oxford: Oxford UP. RICHARDS et al. 1985. Longman Dictionary of Applied Linguistics. London: Longman. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ. Pilar Agustнn Llach
40
Programas 2010/2011
1092006
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1092006 LITERATURA INFANTIL EN IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: INGLЙS
Titulaciуn Maestro-Especialidad en Lengua Extranjera (Inglйs)
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 3
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Teуricos 4,5
Prбcticos Aula 1,5
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ 1.- In this course we aim to introduce the students to some of the major works in British and American childrens literature. 2.- We also aim to develop the awareness of our students (our future primary school teachers) of the importance of childrens literature in education. 3.- We also intend to teach our students to use childrens literature in English as a method for teaching English as a foreign language. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ PROGRAMA TEУRICO: 1.- Introduction: Approaching Childrens Literature. Defining Childrens literature. Childrens Literature Criticism. 2.- Poetry 3.- Picture Books 4.- Traditional Literature 5.- Modern Fantasy 6.- Realistic Fiction 7.- Historical Fiction 8.- Nonfiction 9.- Multicultural Literature PROGRAMA DE PRБCTICAS : 1.- Reading, commentary and analysis of some of the following texts (or selections of t -Traditional fairy tales -Alices Adventures in Wonderland by Lewis Carroll -Peter Pan by James M. Barrie -The Secret Garden by Frances Hodgson Burnett -Winnie the Pooh by A. Alexander Milne -The Tale of Peter Rabbit by Beatrix Potter -Charlie and the Chocolate Factory by Roald Dahl - Snowman. Raymond Briggs. Puffin -Little Lord Fauntleroy by Frances Hodgson Burnett - Treasure Island by Robert Louis Stevenson 2.-Some video presentations based on childrens books will be done in class and commented upon afterwards: Treasure Island, Peter Pan, The Secret Garden, Winnie the Pooh, The Tale of Peter Rabbit, etc. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Grading will be based on the following aspects: 1.- Final examination (60%) . The exam will consist of two parts: Theory (30%) and Commentary (30%) 3.-Submission of a written lesson plan and oral presentation of the lesson in class (30%) 2.- Participation in class (10%) All of the above must be performed with a level of English language equivalent to Idioma Extranjero: Inglйs III. All of the above must be performed with a level of English language equivalent to Idioma Extranjero: Inglйs III.
41
Programas 2010/2011 __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Bettelheim, B.1976. The Uses of Enchantment. The Meaning and Importance of Fairy Tales. Penguin Books. Carpenter, H. and Prichard, M. 1991. The Oxford Companion to Childrens Literature. Oxford. Carpenter, H. 1987. Secret Gardens: A Study of the Golden Age of Childrens Literature. George Allen & Unwin Ltd. London. Hunt, Peter. 1994. An Introduction to Childrens Literature. Oxford University Press. Hunt, Peter (edit). 1996. International Companion Encyclopedia of Childrens Literature. Routledge. Lynch-Brown, C. & C.M. Tomlinson.2008. Essentials of Childrenґs Literature. Boston: Pearson. Lurie, A. 1990. Dont Tell The Grown-Ups. Subversive Childrens Literature. London: Bloomsbury. Philip, N. 1992. English Folktales. London: Penguin. Propp, Vladimir.1998. Morphology of the Folktale. University of Texas. Austin. Jones, Steven Swann.1995. The Fairy Tale: The Magic Mirror of Imagination. Twayne Publishers. New York. Townsend, J.R. 1990. Written For Children. London: The Bodley Head. Zipes, Jack.1993. Fairy Tale as Myth. Myth as Fairy Tale. The University Press of Kentucky. Zipes, Jack (edit). 2000. The Oxford Companion to Fairy Tales. Oxford University Press. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Carolina Taboada Ferrero 42
Programas 2010/2011
1093001
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1093001 GRAMБTICA TEXTUAL DEL IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: INGLЙS
Titulaciуn Maestro-Especialidad en Lengua Extranjera (Inglйs)
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura Op
Curso 1cl
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 4,5
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 1,5
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ This course has two main aims: the first one is an attempt to increase the students linguistic competence both in written and spoken English through a reflection about the mechanisms governing the English language; the second one aims at the students acquisition of the theoretical fundamentals of textual grammar that will help him/her to ameliorate his/her ability to understand and produce texts in English. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ 1. Introduction: key concepts in pragmatics and discourse 2. Speech acts 3. The Cooperative Principle 4. Politeness 5. Conversation __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Students will be assessed throughout the whole course. Final marks will depend on: - Participation in the class. - A compulsory oral presentation. - A final exam. It is also a basic requirement to pass the subject that students express themselves in correct and fluent English, paying especial attention to the specific terminology of the subject. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ BEAUGRANDE, R. & W DRESSLER. 1981. Introduction to Text Linguistics. London: Longman . BERTUCCELLI PAPI, M. 1996. Quй es la Pragmбtica. Barcelona: Paidуs. BLAKEMORE, D. 1992. Understanding Utterances. Oxford: Basil Blackwell. BROWN, G. & G. YULE. 1983. Discourse Analysis, Cambridge: C.U.P. CRUSE, A. 2004. Meaning in Language. An Introduction to Semantics and Pragmatics. Oxford: Oxford University Press. ESCANDELL, M.V. 1993. Introducciуn a la Pragmбtica. Barcelona: Anthropos/UNED FAIRCLOUGH, N., 2003. Analysing Discourse. Textual analysis for social research.. London: Routledge. GRUNDY, P. 2000. Doing Pragmatics. London: Arnold HALLIDAY, M.A.K. & R. HASSAN. 1976. Cohesion in English. London: Longman. HALLIDAY, M.A.K,. 1985. An Introduction to Functional Grammar. London: Arnold. LEECH, G. 1983. Principles of Pragmatics. London: Longman. LEVINSON, S. 1997[1983]. Pragmatics. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press MAIRAL, R., SAMANIEGO, E. & PEСA, M.S. 2005. Ejercicios de Pragmбtica de la Lengua Inglesa. Madrid: UNED. MCCARTHY, M. 1991. Discourse Analysis for Language Teachers. Cambridge: C.U.P. MEY, J.L. 2001[1993]. Pragmatics. An Introduction. 2nd ed. Oxford: Basil Blackwell. SEARLE, J. R., et al. 1980. Speech Acts Theory and Pragmatics. Dordrecht: Reidel. THOMAS, J. 1995. Meaning in Interaction. An Introduction to Pragmatics. London & New York: Longman. SPERBER, D. & D. WILSON. 1996. Relevance: Communication and Cognition. Oxford: Blackwell. VERSCHUEREN, J. 1999. Understanding Pragmatics. London: Arnold.
43
Programas 2010/2011 YULE, G. 1996. Pragmatics. Oxford, O.U.P. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ. Sandra Peсa Cervel 44
Programas 2010/2011
1093002
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1093002 CULTURA Y CIVILIZACIУN DEL PAНS EXTRANJERO: INGLЙS
Titulaciуn Maestro-Especialidad en Lengua Extranjera (Inglйs)
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura Op
Curso 1cl
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 4,5
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 1,5
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ The aim of this course is to provide students with a comprehensive knowledge of the most important aspects of the Culture and Civilization of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland today. The content will be based on the analysis of articles/ chapters from books, films and the Internet. Students will be expected to participate actively in the debates and discussions in class. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ 1.- Places and Peoples: Nation and Region. 2.- Language in Culture: a brief History of the English. Minority languages. 3.- The Cinema. 4.- The Theatre. 5.- The Media: the Press, the Radio and Television. 6.- Education: Schools and Universities 7.- The System of Government and Politics:Government and Parliament. 8.- Class and Politics: The Parties and Elections 9.- Social Security, Health and Housing. 10.-Religion. 11.-Popular Music and Fashion. FILMS: en formato DVD y VHS que ilustran diversos periodos de la cultura y civilizaciуn inglesa y se van a utilizar como punto de partida para dialogar sobre los temas que los mismos abordan. Tнtulos: East is East, Excalibur, Mary of Scotland, Rob Roy, Braveheart, Robin Hood, Chimes at Midnight, The Madness of King George, Sense and Sensibility, A Passage to India, Kim, The Secret Garden, A Room with a View, Howards End, Pygmaleon, The Dead, Mary Poppins, My Fair Lady, Upstairs Downstairs, Gosford Park, The Remains of the Day, Brief Encounter, Maurice, A Clockwork Orange, Ladybird, Ladybird, Sweet Sixteen, My name is Joe, Irish Coffe, Peterґs Friends, Full Monty, My beautiful Launderette. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ -Students are expected to participate in class discussions and to orally give a short presentation on a topic previously discussed with the teacher. -They will also have to write a ten page essay, typed in English. The topic should be also discussed previously with the teacher. -The final exam will ask students to comment on texts, films and ideas that have been dealt during the classes. -The final mark will be the average of the exam, the written essay and the studentґs participation in class, included the orally presentation on a topic. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ BROMHEAD, P., (1985), Life in Modern Britain, 1991, Harlow: Longman. CHRISTOPHER, David, 1999, British Culture: An Introduction. London: Routledge.
45
Programas 2010/2011 MURPHY, R. (1997), The British Cinema Book. London:BFI. OAKLAND, J., (1989), British Civilization: An Introduction, 1996, London and New York: Routledge. SHEERIN, S., Seath, J., White,G.,(1985), Spotlight on Britain, 1991, Oxford University Press STORRY & CHILDS, 1997. British Cultural Identities, London and N.Y.: Routledge. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Profesor pendiente de contratar 46
Programas 2010/2011 110 Diplomado en Ciencias Empresariales 47
Programas 2010/2011
1103017
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1103017 FRANCЙS EMPRESARIAL I
Titulaciуn Diplomatura en Ciencias Empresariales
Tipo de Asignatura Op
Curso 1cl
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 1,5
Prбcticos Laboratorio 1,5
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ El objetivo principal de la asignatura es la adquisiciуn de una competencia comunicativa que permita al alumno desenvolverse en diferentes situaciones de comunicaciуn en el marco de la vida profesional y validar, en el curso o al final de su aprendizaje, sus conocimientos adquiridos por un certificado de francйs profesional (CFP); particularmente pretendemos el desarrollo de las competencias siguientes: 1 Generales: Trabajo en equipo. autoevaluaciуn. conocimiento de otras culturas y costumbres en el mundo cotidiano y en el de la empresa. Manejo de recursos de internet: bъsqueda de informaciуn, 2 Especнficas: - Comprender lo esencial de un mensaje previsible (contexto, aspectos esenciales) de una comunicaciуn cara a cara, o telefуnica, dentro de un бmbito personal y/o profesional. - Comprender el sentido general y los elementos esenciales de artнculos de prensa sencillos y de documentos de comunicaciуn de la empresa normales (horarios, cartas, fax, e-mails, notas e informes), asн como otros mбs comunes (publicitarios, informativos, turнsticos). - Establecer contactos sociales, describir su profesiуn, su actividad, ejercitarse en conversaciones telefуnicas: solicitar informaciуn, reservar servicios, quedar con amigos, con colegas de trabajo, intercambiar informaciones, expresar su opiniуn decir sus preferencias en situaciones concretas y sobre temas conocidos. - Redactar textos cortos y sencillos en relaciуn con una actividad social o profesional. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ El programa consta de seis unidades didбcticas con contenidos comunicativos y competenciales relativos a algunos aspectos del mundo profesional y de la empresa: 1.-Presentaciуn personal y presentaciуn de la empresa: Saludar, dar las gracias, felicitar, despedirse. hablar de su trabajo, de su experiencia, de sus proyectos profesionales. 2.- El marco o entorno profesional: bъsqueda de un empleo de unas prбcticas de empresa, primeras entrevistas de trabajo. 3.-Bъsqueda de un apartamento: el banco, el dinero. 4.-Viajar por negocios: Describir una ciudad, un hotel , aeropuertos y estaciones5.- Las relaciones fuera de trabajo: lugares de encuentro, de visita, organizar una comida de negocios. 6.-.Conocer, describir una empresa. Prбcticas de aula Actividades individuales y de grupo que suponen el desarrollo de tareas especнficas con objetivos de aprendizaje comunicativos, lingьнsticos e interculturales relativos a las situaciones de comunicaciуn de las unidades didбcticas. Escucha de documentos audio. Tareas sobre la comprensiуn y expresiуn orales y escritas. La comunicaciуn telefуnica: Recibir y transmitir mensajes sencillos por telйfono Leer y redactar un CV. Una carta de motivaciуn. Leer documentos relacionados con la empresa. Completar impresos y formularios. Tomar notas. Redactar mensajes cortos, notas, cartas sencillas. Visionado de documentos relativos al mundo de la empresa . Situaciones que permiten al alumno comparar y debatir aspectos relacionados con el comportamiento intercultural en el medio profesional. Estudios de caso. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__D__E__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__E__N__L_A__B_O__R__A_T__O__R_I_O__Y__C__A_M__P__O___________________________________ Tareas de Internet aplicadas a la Enseсanza de Lenguas:
49
Programas 2010/2011 - Ejercicios tradicionales - Actividades de Simulaciуn - Bъsquedas y navegaciones Dichas actividades pueden realizarse en presencia del docente en una clase de ordenadores o a distancia, en el Aula Virtual. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ La evaluaciуn se apoya en los criterios siguientes: 1 Autoevaluaciуn. los libros de referencia, de texto, asн como algunos documentos electrуnicos ofrecen actividades y sus correcciones. el alumno puede recurrir al profesor en horario de tutorнas presenciales y /o virtuales. 2. Evaluaciуn continъa. en este apartado se evaluarб: 2.1 - La asistencia y participaciуn activa del alumno en clase y su implicaciуn en las actividades individuales y de grupo. su valoraciуn es de un 15% de la nota final. 2.2. - La realizaciуn y entrega de trabajos individuales y/o de grupo junto con las tareas del Aula Virtual. En este apartado figuran ejercicios escritos y exposiciones orales. Se tendrб en cuenta la calidad del trabajo. Su valoraciуn es de un 15%. 3 - Examen final. Esta prueba constarб de unos ejercicios escritos y de una exposiciуn oral de unos 8 minutos. Su valor es de un 70% de la nota. - Prueba escrita sobre contenidos que han conformado los objetivos de aprendizaje. - Expresiуn escrita: redacciуn de un texto relacionado con las situaciones de comunicaciуn del programa. - Comprensiуn oral: escucha de un documento relacionado con las situaciones de comunicaciуn del programa y ejercicio de respuestas a preguntas sobre el mismo. -Expresiуn oral: Diбlogo en interacciуn con el profesor y simulaciуn de una situaciуn de la vida social o profesional relativa al programa tambiйn en interacciуn. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Corado, L. 2004. @ffaires 1. SGEL Guillmann, B. 2007. Travailler en franзais en entreprise. HachetteGruneberg, A. y Tauzen, B. 2000. Comment vont les affaires. Paris. Hachette. Penfornis, J. L. 2003. Franзais com. Paris Clй International Grйgoire, M. et Thiйvenaz, O. 1995. Grammaire progressive du franзais Parнs. Clй International Robert, P :1999. Micro-Robert dictionnaire du franзais primordial. Parнs: S.N.L.Le Robert. Garcнa -Pelayo y Gross, Ramуn. 1999. Gran Diccionario espaсol-francйs/francйs-espaсol. Barcelona: Larousse. Documents electroniques: pages d'Internet Documents йcrits: articles de presse, publicitйs, Documents vidйo: La voyagerie Vivez les affaires Extraits de films Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ. Бngeles Moreno Lara 50
Programas 2010/2011
1103018
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1103018 INGLЙS EMPRESARIAL I
Titulaciуn Diplomatura en Ciencias Empresariales
Tipo de Asignatura Op
Curso 1cl
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula
Prбcticos Laboratorio 3
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ Los principales objetivos de esta habilidad curricular, que se imparte siguiendo el modelo-mixto de enseсanza (3 crйditos de enseсanza presencial y 3 crйditos de enseсanza virtual) y que va dirigida a personas con unos conocimientos de la lengua inglesa a un nivel intermedio-bajo, son consolidar los recursos lйxicos, gramaticales y discursivos de la lengua inglesa y profundizar en otros nuevos con el fin de comunicarse formalmente en el entorno de la empresa. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ En esta asignatura se propicia un aprendizaje autуnomo y ligado a la propia experiencia del estudiante. El carбcter teуrico-prбctico de la enseсanza presencial de la asignatura en el aula y en las prбcticas de laboratorio de idiomas lleva consigo una continua combinaciуn de explicaciones teуricas y ejercicios y actividades prбcticas para favorecer su asimilaciуn. La enseсanza virtual complementa el estudio de las caracterнsticas genйricas del inglйs empresarial que se lleva a cabo en la parte presencial. A) Contenidos de la docencia presencial: Companies, Leadership, Strategy, Pay, Development, Marketing,,Outsourcing and Finance. B) Contenidos de la docencia virtual: Globalisation, Brands, Travel, Advertising, Money and Change __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__D__E__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__E__N__L_A__B_O__R__A_T__O__R_I_O__Y__C__A_M__P__O___________________________________ Las prбcticas de laboratorio, bien en el Edificio Quintiliano, bien en el Aula 101 del Edificio Filologнas (Sala de Audiovisuales), tienen el mismo carбcter. En dichas prбcticas se intentarбn reforzar las destrezas de comprensiуn y expresiуn oral. Por todo ello, las actividades que se realizarбn durante estas sesiones serбn las siguientes: audiciones, visionado de pelнculas de informaciуn empresarial o similares a las descritas en los textos utilizados en las clases presenciales, debates y discusiones acerca de temas empresariales, exposiciones orales por parte de los alumnos sobre los temas estudiados en el programa, exposiciones orales acerca de situaciones especнficas del бmbito empresarial, ejercicios de role-playing en los que los alumnos deberбn representar distintos papeles relacionados con el mundo de la empresa ante posibles problemas expuestos asн como otras actividades propias de la asignatura. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ La evaluaciуn final de la asignatura serб un compendio de todas aquellas actividades que se hayan realizado a lo largo del curso acadйmico. Asн se valorarб: 1) La participaciуn activa de los alumnos en las actividades realizadas en las clases; 2) La asistencia a las prбcticas de laboratorio y la realizaciуn de las actividades asignadas cada dнa (El examen final escrito tendrб un ejercicio de comprensiуn auditiva basado en los textos utilizados en las prбcticas de laboratorio); 3) La entrega a tiempo de las actividades on-line (Consultar el calendario en el aula virtual) Los ejercicios on-line estбn secuenciados en unidades y cada unidad comprende una serie de ejercicios que serбn activados temporalmente en el aula virtual. Los alumnos deberбn obtener la puntuaciуn mбxima en cada una de ellos. Aquellos estudiantes que no realicen las actividades on-line no podrбn presentarse al examen escrito. La realizaciуn de dichas actividades puntъan (2 puntos) sуlo durante el curso acadйmico 08/09; 4) La realizaciуn del examen presencial escrito al final del cuatrimestre. Dicho examen constarб de ejercicios prбcticos similares a los realizados durante el curso tanto en la parte presencial como virtual, es decir, comprensiуn de un texto, ejercicio de comprensiуn auditiva, ejercicios de gramбtica, vocabulario, uso del inglйs, traducciуn de una
51
Programas 2010/2011 carta comercial, ... etc. del tipo respuesta mъltiple, rellenar huecos, matching, detenciуn y correcciуn de errores... etc. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Libros de texto: Clarke, Simon. (2009): In Company pre-intermediate Student's Book, second edition, Oxford: MacMillan Material complementario: Gramбtica: Eastwood, J. (1992): Oxford Practice Grammar, Oxford: Oxford University Press. Murphy, R. (1994): English Grammar in Use, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Swan, M. (1995): Practical English Usage, Oxford: Oxford University Press. Strutt, Peter. 2000. Market leader business grammar and usage. Essex: Longman. Vocabulario: Badger, Ian (2001): Business English phrases. London: Penguin. Badger, Ian (2005) English For Work: Everyday Business English. London: Longman. Evans, David (2000): Business English Verbs. London: Penguin. Eastment, David (2001): Business English Words. London: Penguin. Flinders, Steve (2002): Test Your Professional Business: General. London: Penguin. Redacciуn: Armitage Amato, Rachel (1994): Escribir cartas: Inglйs. Barcelona: Difusiуn. Badger, Ian and Sue Pedley (2005) English For Work: Everyday Business Writing. London: Longman. Freitag-Lawrence, Anne (2005) English For Work: Business Presentations. London: Longman. Sherman, Jane (1994): Feedback. Essential Writing Skills for Intermediate Students, Oxford: Oxford University Press. Lougheed, L. Business correspondence. New York and Philadelphia: Longman. Rosset, Edward R. (1995): Bilingual Business Letters. Cartas Comerciales Bilingьes. Irъn: Stanley. Trask, R. L. (2001): Mind the Gaffe: The Penguin Guide to Common Errors in English. London: Penguin. Diccionarios: a) Monolingьes: Collins COBUILD English Language Dictionary (1987), Collins. Longman Dictionary of Contemporary English (1978), Longman. Longman Dictionary of Business English (1978), Longman. Longman Language Activator (1993), Longman. LTP Dictionary of Selected Collocations (1997), LTP. Oxford Advanced Learner's Dictionary (1995), OUP. Oxford Dictionary of Business English (1995), OUP. b) Bilingьes: Diccionario Oxford inglйs-espaсol, espaсol-inglйs (1998), Oxford: OUP. Diccionario Oxford Business Espaсol-Inglйs Inglйs-Espaсol. 2002. Oxford: O.U.P. Diccionario moderno espaсol-inglйs/English-Spanish (1976), Larousse. The Collins English-Spanish/Spanish-English Dictionary (1989), Collins. Lozano, J.M. 2000. Diccionario Bilingьe de Economнa y Empresa. Madrid: Editorial Pirбmide. Miles, Andrew, 2000. Diccionario de Economнa y Empresa. Inglйs-Espaсol. Espaсol-Inglйs. Barcelona: Gestiуn. Collins. Cobuild. English Dictionary for Advanced Learners. 2001. Third Edition. Glasgow: HaperCollins Diccionario Espaсol-Inglйs. English-Spanish. 2000. Sexta Ediciуn. Glasgow: HarperCollins. Enlaces (prensa especializada en Inglйs Empresarial): http://www.msnbc.com/news/ http://www.time.com/time/ http://www.economist.com/ 52
Programas 2010/2011 http://www.timesonline.co.uk/ http://www.businessweek.com/smallbiz/ http://www.guardian.co.uk/business/ http://www.accountancymag.co.uk/ http://www.prnewswire.com/news/ Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Pedro Araъz Gуmez Cadiсanos y Concepciуn Бlvaro Rojo 53
Programas 2010/2011
1103020
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1103020 INGLЙS EMPRESARIAL II
Titulaciуn Diplomatura en Ciencias Empresariales
Tipo de Asignatura Op
Curso 1cl
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula
Prбcticos Laboratorio 3
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ 1. Desarrollar las destrezas de comprensiуn y producciуn oral y escrita del estudiante de forma que йste alcance un dominio de la lengua inglesa a nivel intermedio-alto, con un йnfasis muy especial en la comunicaciуn oral, y sea capaz de entender textos del бmbito de la empresa y la economнa en lengua inglesa. 2. Profundizar en el estudio de la terminologнa y los gйneros especнficos del contexto de las finanzas, la empresa y la economнa, al tiempo que se incrementa la cultura general en materia comercial de los alumnos con alusiones a nuevas tendencias empresariales y de administraciуn, tйcnicas de marketing y direcciуn, gestiуn de calidad, etc. 3. Mejorar la capacidad de los alumnos para expresarse y comunicarse en inglйs tanto verbalmente como por escrito, sabiendo seleccionar los registros adecuados para cada situaciуn. En este бmbito, se harб hincapiй en la destreza para defender ideas y rebatir las contrarias con argumentos lo mбs sуlidos posibles. 4. Estimular el interйs por la lectura de textos e informaciones relacionadas con las distintas facetas del mundo empresarial con el fin de desarrollar la capacidad de asimilaciуn de datos y la posibilidad de utilizar esos datos con exposiciones orales o en la elaboraciуn de trabajos o informes por escrito. 5. Poner al dнa a los alumnos en materia de los negocios, mediante el trabajo en contextos econуmicos, comerciales y financieros reales, contratos y textos sobre condiciones de pedidos, pagos, acuerdos o transacciones por medio de casos prбcticos. 6. Animar a los estudiantes para que se interesen por los recursos que Internet ofrece para el aprendizaje y el perfeccionamiento del inglйs empresarial. Para ello se les familiarizarб con las amplias posibilidades que ofrecen las Nuevas Tecnologнas en todos los sectores del mundo empresarial. Se insistirб especialmente en la bъsqueda de los productos de informaciуn de бmbito global sobre direcciуn y administraciуn de empresas u otros aspectos del mundo empresarial. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ Metodologнa: Descripciуn: En esta asignatura se propicia un aprendizaje autуnomo y ligado a la propia experiencia del estudiante. El carбcter teуrico-prбctico de la enseсanza presencial de la asignatura lleva consigo una continua combinaciуn de explicaciones teуricas y ejercicios y actividades prбcticas para favorecer su asimilaciуn. La enseсanza virtual complementa el estudio de las caracterнsticas genйricas del inglйs empresarial que se lleva a cabo en la parte presencial. A) Нndice de contenidos de la docencia presencial: 1. Compaснas: estructura y organizaciуn 2. Liderazgo 3. Estrategias 4. Pagos 5. Desarrollo 6. Marketing 7. Recursos a fuentes externas 8. Finanzas B) Нndice de contenidos de la docencia virtual: 1. Compaснas: estructura y organizaciуn 2. Contrataciуn y empleo
54
Programas 2010/2011 3. Marcas y Marketing. 4. Viajes y aspectos socio-culturales de los negocios. 5. Innovaciуn y desarrollo 6. Reuniones y citas __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__D__E__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__E__N__L_A__B_O__R__A_T__O__R_I_O__Y__C__A_M__P__O___________________________________ Las prбcticas de laboratorio constituirбn una parte esencial de la formaciуn de nuestros alumnos. La utilizaciуn de medios audiovisuales serб el complemento necesario e imprescindible para una formaciуn global en la enseсanza de dicha asignatura. Los alumnos deberбn ser conscientes de que la docencia a travйs de las prбcticas de laboratorio es un elemento fundamental, sin el cual la enseсanza de una lengua no resultarнa completa. En estas prбcticas de laboratorio se intentarбn reforzar las dos destrezas lingьнsticas que estбn referidas a la expresiуn oral, listening o comprensiуn oral y speaking o expresiуn oral. Por todo ello, las actividades que se realizarбn durante la realizaciуn de las prбcticas de laboratorio serбn las siguientes: - audiciones orales a travйs de cintas, CDs, etc. - vнdeos con informaciуn empresarial. - vнdeos de situaciones similares a las descritas en los textos utilizados en las clases presenciales. - debates y discusiones acerca de temas empresariales. - exposiciones orales por parte de los alumnon sobre temas estudiados en el programa. - exposiciones orales acerca de situaciones especнficas del бmbito empresarial. - ejercicios de role-playing, en los que los alumnos deberбn representar distintos papeles relacionados con el mundo de la empresa ante posibles problemas expuestos. - otras actividades propias de la asignatura. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ La evaluaciуn final de la asignatura serб un compendio de todas aquellas actividades que se hayan realizado a lo largo del curso acadйrmico. Por ello, se valorarбn la realizaciуn de las prбcticas de laboratorio, asн como la participaciуn en las actividades realizadas en las clases presenciales. Igualmente, para poder tener acceso al examen final, los alumnos deberбn completar todos los ejercicios on-line previstos para este cuatrimestre. Los ejercicios on-line estarбn secuenciados en unidades y cada unidad comprenderб una serie de ejercicios que serбn activados temporalmente en el aula virtual. Aquellos alumnos que no realicen la parte on-line no podrбn presentarse al examen. La realizaciуn de las actividades on-line supondrб una parte porcentual de la calificaciуn final y los alumnos deben tener presente que dichas actividades on-line puntъan sуlo durante el aсo acadйmico en curso. Finalmente, habrб un examen presencial escrito al final del cuatrimestre. Dicho examen constarб de ejercicios prбcticos similares a los realizados durante el curso, tanto en la parte presencial como virtual, es decir, comprensiуn de textos escritos y auditivos, ejercicios de gramбtica, vocabulario, uso del inglйs, traducciуn, correspondencia comercial, resъmenes,... etc. ejercicios del tipo respuesta mъltiple, rellenar huecos, matching, crucigramas, detecciуn y correcciуn de errores, etc. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Libros de texto: Trappe, Tonya & Graham Tullis (2005) Intelligent Business Coursebook: Intermediate Business English. London: Longman. Pile, Louise (2005) Intelligent Business Workbook: Intermediate Business English. London: Longman Material complementario: Gramбtica: Eastwood, J. (1992): Oxford Practice Grammar, Oxford: Oxford University Press. Murphy, R. (1994): English Grammar in Use, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Swan, M. (1995): Practical English Usage, Oxford: Oxford University Press. 55
Programas 2010/2011 Strutt, Peter. 2000. Market leader business grammar and usage. Essex: Longman. Vocabulario: Badger, Ian (2001): Business English phrases. London: Penguin. Badger, Ian (2005) English For Work: Everyday Business English. London: Longman. Evans, David (2000): Business English Verbs. London: Penguin. Eastment, David (2001): Business English Words. London: Penguin. Flinders, Steve (2002): Test Your Professional Business: General. London: Penguin. Redacciуn: Armitage Amato, Rachel (1994): Escribir cartas: Inglйs. Barcelona: Difusiуn. Badger, Ian and Sue Pedley (2005) English For Work: Everyday Business Writing. London: Longman. Freitag-Lawrence, Anne (2005) English For Work: Business Presentations. London: Longman. Sherman, Jane (1994): Feedback. Essential Writing Skills for Intermediate Students, Oxford: Oxford University Press. Lougheed, L. Business correspondence. New York and Philadelphia: Longman. Rosset, Edward R. (1995): Bilingual Business Letters. Cartas Comerciales Bilingьes. Irъn: Stanley. Trask, R. L. (2001): Mind the Gaffe: The Penguin Guide to Common Errors in English. London: Penguin. Diccionarios: A) Monolingьes: Collins COBUILD English Language Dictionary (1987), Collins. Longman Dictionary of Contemporary English (1978), Longman. Longman Dictionary of Business English (1978), Longman. Longman Language Activator (1993), Longman. LTP Dictionary of Selected Collocations (1997), LTP. Oxford Advanced Learner's Dictionary (1995), OUP. Oxford Dictionary of Business English (1995), OUP. B) Bilingьes: Diccionario Oxford inglйs-espaсol, espaсol-inglйs (1998), Oxford: OUP. Diccionario Oxford Business Espaсol-Inglйs Inglйs-Espaсol. 2002. Oxford: O.U.P. Diccionario moderno espaсol-inglйs/English-Spanish (1976), Larousse. The Collins English-Spanish/Spanish-English Dictionary (1989), Collins. Lozano, J.M. 2000. Diccionario Bilingьe de Economнa y Empresa. Madrid: Editorial Pirбmide. Miles, Andrew, 2000. Diccionario de Economнa y Empresa. Inglйs-Espaсol. Espaсol-Inglйs. Barcelona: Gestiуn. Collins. Cobuild. English Dictionary for Advanced Learners. 2001. Third Edition. Glasgow: HaperCollins Diccionario Espaсol-Inglйs. English-Spanish. 2000. Sexta Ediciуn. Glasgow: HarperCollins. C) Enlaces (prensa especializada en Inglйs Empresarial): http://www.msnbc.com/news/ http://www.time.com/time/ http://www.economist.com/ http://www.timesonline.co.uk/ http://www.businessweek.com/smallbiz/ http://www.guardian.co.uk/business/ http://www.accountancymag.co.uk/ http://www.prnewswire.com/news/ Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Pedro Araъz Gуmez Cadiсanos 56
Programas 2010/2011 111 Maestro Especialidad en Lengua Extranjera (Francйs) 57
Programas 2010/2011
1111001
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1111001 IDIOMA EXTRANJERO I: FRANCЙS
Titulaciуn
Departamento
Maestro-Especialidad en Lengua Extranjera (Francйs) Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 1
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ El objetivo principal de la asignatura Idioma I (francйs) es la adquisiciуn de una competencia comunicativa que permita al alumno desenvolverse en diferentes situaciones de comunicaciуn en el marco de la vida cotidiana; los conocimientos y las competencias adquiridas corresponden al nivel A2/B1 del Marco Europeo Comъn de Referencia para las Lenguas; particularmente el alumno va a ser capaz de : - comprender el sentido general y los aspectos particulares de articulos y textos asн como documentos auditivos relacionados con la vida cotidiana. Comprender los cambios de impresiones en una conversaciуn. - ejercitarse en la producciуn escrita, redactar mensajes cortos usuales, sin complicaciуn en relaciуn con una actividad social. - intercambiar informaciones, expresar su opiniуn decir sus preferencias sobre temas variados y conocidos. - confeccionar diбlogos, resъmenes de textos, o relatos de creaciуn libre sobre un tema propuesto. - participar en actividades de simulaciуn y/o de creatividad. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ Consolidaciуn de los conocimientos y las competencias que corresponden al nivel A2/B1 y permiten su consecuciуn de comunicaciуn oral y escrita dentro del Marco Comъn Europeo de Referencia para las Lenguas Extranjeras. Los contenidos comunicativos, lingьнsticos y socioculturales se articulan alrededor de seis temas que corresponden a las unidades 7-12 de Connexions , Mйthode de Franзais Niveau 2 . - 1. Contenidos gramaticales: - El empleo neutro de los pronombres le, en, y - Los pronombres demostrativos - El empleo del relativo dont - Los pronombres relativos compuestos: lequel, laquelle... - Los pronombres interrogativos - Los adverbios. La formaciуn de los adverbios en ment. - Revisiуn de los tiempos del modo indicativo. - Los empleos del subjuntivo y las conjugaciones irregulares, - La forma pasiva. - Los conectores del discurso - La expresiуn de la condiciуn y de la hipуtesis - La expresiуn de la causa y de la consecuencia. - La expresiуn del tiempo. - 2. Contenidos socio-culturales: - El comportamiento social: El saber estar, las buenas maneras. - La ciudad y la movilidad. - 3: Comportamiento y mundo solidario - 4: Moda y marcas - 5: Vida activa: empleo y trabajo laboral - 6: El consumo
59
Programas 2010/2011 __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Constarб de una prueba escrita de 2 horas y una prueba oral de unos 10 minutos (10 puntos) __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Merieux, Rйgine et Loiseau, Yves. 2004. Connexions Methode de Franзais niveau 2. Didier/Edelsa. Barthe, Marie et Chovelon, Bernadette. 2003. Le Franзais par les textes II. Presses Universitaires de Grenoble. Gregoire, Maпa et Thiйvenaz, Odile. 1995. Grammaire Progressive du Franзais. Clй International. Grammaire progressive du franзais. Paris Clй International Robert, Paul. 1971. Micro-Robert dictionnaire du franзais primordial. Parнs: S.N.L.Le Robert. Garcнa -Pelayo y Gross, Ramуn. (1999) Gran Diccionario espaсol-francйs/framcйs-espaсol Barcelona: Larousse. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ. Бngeles Moreno Lara. 60
Programas 2010/2011
1111002
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1111002 MORFOSINTAXIS DEL IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: FRANCЙS
Titulaciуn
Departamento
Maestro-Especialidad en Lengua Extranjera (Francйs) Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 2
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Teуricos 4,5
Prбcticos Aula 1,5
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ El objetivo principal de una enseсanza aprendizaje de una lengua es la adquisiciуn de una competencia comunicativa y dentro de йsta se integra la competencia gramatical. Su estudio se propone los objetivos siguientes: Que el alumno reflexione a partir de las actividades orales y escritas sobre el empleo y la funcionalidad de las estructuras gramaticales, principalmente en el marco de estudio de la frase. Ejercitarse en actividades de aplicaciуn de las estructuras que se han analizado, dentro de un contexto, de modo que su empleo sea expresivo y comunicativo. Integrar la gramбtica en actividades de comunicaciуn. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ Unitй 1: La syntaxe de la phrase 1. La structure de la phrase en franзais 2. Les differents types de phrase : la phrase interrogative, la phrase nйgative Unitй 2: Le nom et les dйterminants 1. Le genre et le nombre du nom 2. Les articles 3. Les dйterminants : Les pronoms personnels Les adjectifs et pronoms possessifs Les adjectifs et pronoms indйfinis Les pronoms relatifs 4. L ` expression de la quantitй Unitй 3: Le verbe 1. Les auxiliaires avoir et кtre 2. La forme passive 3. La forme pronominale 4. La forme impersonnelle 5. Le mode indicatif et ses temps : L'expression du prйsent L'expression du futur : le futur simple et le futur antйrieur L'expression du passй La concordance des temps а l'indicatif le discours rapportй 7. Le mode subjontif Unitй 4: Les modes impersonnels 1 Le mode infinitif 2 Le mode participe Unitй 5: Les mots invariables 1 Les prйpositions 2 L'adverbe Unitй 6: Les Relations Logiques 1. L'expression de la cause 2. L'expression de la consйquence et du but
61
Programas 2010/2011 __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Constarб de una prueba escrita de unas dos horas. (Valoraciуn 10 puntos) __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ CAPELLE, G. et GRILLET, F. 1998. Cest facile а dire. Recueil dExercices de Grammaire et dActes de Parole. Hatier/Didier. DESCOTES-GENON, Ch. 1992. Lexercisier. Presses universitaires de Grenoble. GREGOIRE, M. et THIЙVENAZ, O. 1995. Grammaire Progressive du Franзais (Niveau avancй). Clй International. POISSON-QUINTON, S. et MIMRAN R. et MAHЙO-LE COPADIC. 2002. Grammaire Expliqueй du Franзais. Clй International. Exercices de Grammaire en Contexte. 2000. Niveau intermйdiaire. Hachette. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: 62
Programas 2010/2011
1111003
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1111003 HISTORIA DE LA LITERATURA EXTRANJERA: FRANCЙS
Titulaciуn
Departamento
Maestro-Especialidad en Lengua Extranjera (Francйs) Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 2
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ Se pretende introducir al alumno en las principales tendencias, movimientos y autores de la Literatura Francesa. El curso de Literatura Francesa consta de dos partes: una teуrica (programa teуrico) y otra prбctica (lecturas y comentarios). La lectura se efectuarб sobre un conjunto de obras literarias correspondientes a los autores estudiados. Dada su importancia para el buen seguimiento del curso, su lectura es obligatoria: para presentarse al examen final de curso es condiciуn necesaria haberse leнdo todas las lecturas. Estas serбn evaluadas por el profesor en la fecha que se propone ken el calendario de lecturas. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ PROGRAMA teуrico: Edad Media 1. Le rйcit courtois et fйerique: Les lais de Marie de France.. 2. Les fabliaux: origine, types, public, caractйristiques. De la Renaissance au XVIIIe siиcle. 3. Du Moyen Вge а la Renaissance. Franзois Rabelais: Gargantua et Pantagruel. 4. Le siиcle classique: le thйвtre. Moliиre: Le malade imaginaire. Les fables de La Fontaine. 5. Le Siиcle des Lumiиres: Le conte philosophique: Voltaire. Candide. XIXe siиcle 6. Jules Verne: Les voyages extraordinaires . Apprentissage et initiation. Les cinq cents millions de la Bйgum. XXe siиcle 7. Le thйвtre de l'absurde: S. Beckett: En attendant Godot.. LECTURA y COMENTARIO LITERARIO de los siguientes libros: 1 lais de Marie de France Folio ou Le livre de Poche. 2 Fabliaux. Gallimard: Folio o Ed. Bilingьe De Felicia Casas. Cбtedra, 1994. 3 Franзois Rabelais: Gargantua et Pantagruel. Alianza o Cбtedra. 4 Moliиre: Le malade imaginaire. Classiques Illustrйs Hachette. 1973. 5 La Fontaine: choix de Fables en Le loup et l'agneau et autres fables. Gallimard, 1994. 6 Voltaire: Candide en Romans et Contes. Garnier-Flammarion o en Roman et Contes. Gallimard, 2005. 7 Jules Verne: Les cinq cents millions de la Bйgum. Le livre de Poche. 1996. 8 S. Beckett: En attendant Godot. Eds. de Minuit.1966 __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ La evaluaciуn constarб de una parte teуrica (temas) y de una parte prбctica (comentario literario de un texto correspondiente a una de las lecturas del curso).
63
Programas 2010/2011 __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ AA.VV: Introduction а la vie littйraire de... Paris: Bordas, 1968-1970. ABRAHAM, P ET DESNE, R. (dirs): Histoire Littйraire de la France. Paris: Eds. Sociales, 1965-82. COHEN, G.: La vida literaria en la Edad Media. F.C.E., 1983. GARCIA GUAL, C.: Primeras novelas europeas. Barcelona: Its,mo. BAJTIN, M.: La cultura popular en la Edad Media y en el Renacimiento. Barcelona: Barral, 1974. BENMUSSA, S.: Eugиne Ionesco, Paris: Seghers, 1969. CASTEX, P. G.: Micromйgas, ЗCandide, L? Ingenu de Voltaire. Paris: CDU/SEDES, 1977. DUVIGNAUD ET LAGOUTTE: Le thйвtre franзais contemporain. Paris: Larousse, 1974. LEVIN, H.: El realismo francйs. Barcelona: Laia, 1974. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ. Jesъs Salinero Cascante. 64
Programas 2010/2011
1111004
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1111004 DIDБCTICA DEL IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: FRANCЙS
Titulaciуn
Departamento
Maestro-Especialidad en Lengua Extranjera (Francйs) Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 3
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Teуricos 4,5
Prбcticos Aula 1,5
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ - Conocer teуrica y prбcticamente el manejo de destrezas orales y escritas en L.E. - Enseсar a secuenciar materiales de francйs para el logro de una tarea en Primaria - Enseсar programar de acuerdo con el D.C.B. de L.E. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ 1.- Enseсanza-aprendizaje de destrezas orales. 2.- Enseсanza-aprendizaje de destrezas escritas. 3.- Mйtodos de enseсanza en L. E. 4.- Diseсo Curricular Base de francйs en Primaria. 5.- Evaluaciуn del proceso de enseсanza/aprendizaje en Primaria. 6.- Anбlisis de materiales de francйs para Primaria. 7.- Diseсo de tareas de francйs en Primaria. 8.- Secuenciaciуn de actividades para el logro de tareas. 9.- Propuesta de materiales de francйs para Primaria. 10.-Asistencia a prбcticas de francйs en Primaria. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ - Aplicaciуn prбctica de conocimientos teуricos sobre didбctica de la L.E. a travйs de las cuatro destrezas. - Presentaciуn de una unidad programada segъn el mйtodo por tareas. La unidad didбctica deberб estar justifificada a partir de los principios teуricos abordados en los contenidos del programa. En la presentaciуn de dicha unidad deberбn figurar, ademбs, los materiales necesarios para su puesta en prбctica. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ MANUALES DE FRANCЙS PARA PRIMARIA MATERIALES DE FRANCЙS EN PRIMARIA SANCHEZ QUINTANA (1995): Las cuatro destrezas, Madrid, S.M. V.V.A.A. (1998): Tareas: Colecciуn de materiales didбcticos mediante tareas, Barcelona, Difusiуn Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ. Luz Oyуn Baсales
65
Programas 2010/2011
1111005
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1111005 SEMБNTICA DEL IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: FRANCЙS
Titulaciуn
Departamento
Maestro-Especialidad en Lengua Extranjera (Francйs) Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 3
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 3
Teуricos 1,5
Prбcticos Aula 1,5
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ Analizar el significado, las relaciones y la clasificaciуn del vocabulario francйs. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ 1. La sйmantique. Dйfinition. 2. Le procиs sйmantique. 3. La fonction sйmantique. 4. Le mot. 5. La synonymie. Lґantonymie. 6. La polysйmie. 7, Lґhomonymie. 8. Les changements sйmantiques. 9. Les champs sйmantiques. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Participaciуn en el aula y examen escrito teуrico-prбctico. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ ATTAL, P., Questions de sйmantique. Йditions Peeters, Parнs, 1994. COURTЙS, J., Sйmantique de lґйnoncй. Hachette, Parнs, 1989. CHARAUDEAU, P., Grammaire du sens et de lґexpression. Hachette Йducation, Parнs, 1992. GUIRAUD, P., La sйmantique. Presses Universitaires de France, Parнs, 1975. POTTIER, B., Sйmantique gйnйrale. Presses Universitaires de France, Parнs, 1992. ULLMANN, S., Prйcis de sйmantique franзaise. Йditions Francke Berne, 1975. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ. Josй Bonachнa Caballero
66
Programas 2010/2011
1111006
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1111006 FONЙTICA DEL IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: FRANCЙS
Titulaciуn
Departamento
Maestro-Especialidad en Lengua Extranjera (Francйs) Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 1
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ Iniciar al alumno a un adecuado conocimiento de la pronunciaciуn de la lengua francesa. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ 1. Generalidades. Fonйtica y Fonologнa. 2. El proceso fisiolуgico de la producciуn de los sonidos del lenguaje articulado. 3. El sistema vocбlico francйs. 4. El sistema consonбntico francйs. 5. Fonйtica combinatoria. 6. El acento y la entonaciуn. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Examen compuesto de dos apartados: - Teуrico. - Prбctico. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ ABRY, Dominique (1996-1998): Phonйtique. 2 vols. Vanves: Hachette. CHARLIAC, Lucille y MOTRON, Annie-Claude [1998]: Phonйtique progressive du franзais: avec 600 exercices. Parнs: CLE International. PAGNIEZ-DELBART, Thйrиse (1991): А lйcoute des sons. Les voyelles. Parнs: CLE International. PAGNIEZ-DELBART, Thйrиse (1992): А lйcoute des sons. Les consonnes. Parнs: CLE International. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Ignacio Iсarrea Las Heras.
67
Programas 2010/2011
1112001
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1112001 IDIOMA EXTRANJERO II: FRANCЙS
Titulaciуn
Departamento
Maestro-Especialidad en Lengua Extranjera (Francйs) Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 2
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ - Consolidaciуn de las competencias de comunicaciуn definidas como nivel B1 dentro del Marco comъn europeo de referencia para el aprendizaje de la lengua extranjera. - Adquisiciуn de conocimientos gramaticales, lйxicos, comunicativos y culturales necesarios para desenvolverse interactivamente en distintos бmbitos de la vida social. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ Unidades 1 a 5 incluidas del mйtodo Connexions, niveau 3 que incluye contenidos gramaticales y culturales asн como actos de habla para conseguir diferentes competencias de comunicaciуn: escuchar, leer, hablar, escribir, interactuar, etc.. Contenidos socioculturales : Unidad 1.- Les vacances des Franзais Unidad 2.- Les stйreotypes culturels Unidad 3.- Images de la France actuelle Unidad 4.- Dйcouverte de quelques chansons franзaises Unidad 5.- Les Franзais et leurs йconomies __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ El examen final constarб de dos partes: A) Evaluaciуn de destrezas escritas (comprensiуn y expresiуn) a partir de un texto. El alumno deberб responder a diferentes preguntas de comprensiуn textual, gramatical y de vocabulario. Deberб elaborar ademбs un ejercicio de redacciуn de unas 250 palabras aproximadamente. B) Evaluaciуn de destrezas orales (comprensiуn y expresiуn). El alumno responderб por escrito a preguntas de comprensiуn de un texto escuchado previamente. Por otro lado, harб un ejercicio de exposiciуn y argumentaciуn oral de un texto durante unos 10 m. aproximadamente. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Mйrieux R., Loiseau I., Bouvier B., Connexions, Niveau 3 Mйthode de franзais. Didier, 2005. Garcнa Pelayo y Gross R., Testas J., Dictionnaire moderne franзais-espagnol/espagnol-franзais. Paris, Larousse, 1991. Robert P., Le Petit Robert. Dictionnaire alphabйtique et analogique. Paris, Le Robert 1967. Les Usuels Robert. Ross Steele., Civilisation progressive du franзais. Clй Internationale. Le Noveau Bescherelle, L'ar t de conjuguer. Dictionnaire des 8.000 verbes. Sgel. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ. Josй Bonachнa Caballero
68
Programas 2009/2010
1112002
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1112002 IDIOMA EXTRANJERO III: FRANCЙS
Titulaciуn
Departamento
Maestro-Especialidad en Lengua Extranjera (Francйs) Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 2
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ Se pretende que los alumnos: - Perfeccionen su competencia comunicativa oral y escrita en lengua francesa. - Profundicen sus conocimientos de cultura francesa. - Puedan preparar el acceso al nivel B2 de las pruebas DELF. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ Unidades 6 a 10 (incluнdas) del mйtodo Connexions, niveau 3 en las que se incluyen contenidos gramaticales y culturales asн como actos de habla , asн como ejercicios de argumentaciуn oral y escrita. Contenidos socioculturales : Unidad 6.- Dйcouverte de quelques rйalitйs sociales franзaises : revenus, impфts, taxes, etc. Unidad 7.- Les reprйsentations culturelles du monde. L'Union europйenne. Unidad 8.- La francophonie. Unidad 9.- Le monde du travail. Unidad 10.- L'humour et ses diffйrentes formes. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ El examen final constarб de dos partes: A) Evaluaciуn de destrezas escritas (comprensiуn y expresiуn) a partir de un texto. El alumno deberб responder a diferentes preguntas de comprensiуn textual, gramatical y de vocabulario. Deberб elaborar ademбs un ejercicio de redacciуn de unas 300 palabras aproximadamente. B) Evaluaciуn de destrezas orales (comprensiуn y expresiуn). El alumno responderб por escrito a preguntas de comprensiуn de un texto escuchado previamente. Por otro lado, harб un ejercicio de exposiciуn y argumentaciуn oral de un texto durante unos 10 m. aproximadamente. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Mйrieux R., Loiseau I., Bouvier B., Connexions, Niveau 3 Mйthode de franзais. Didier, 2005. Garcнa Pelayo y Gross R., Testas J., Dictionnaire moderne franзais-espagnol/espagnol-franзais. Paris, Larousse, 1991. Robert P., Le Petit Robert. Dictionnaire alphabйtique et analogique. Paris, Le Robert 1967. Les Usuels Robert. Ross Steele., Civilisation progressive du franзais. Clй Internationale. Le Nouveau Bescherelle, L'ar t de conjuguer. Dictionnaire des 8.000 verbes. Sgel. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ. Josй Bonachнa Caballero
69
Programas 2009/2010
1112003
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1112003 ADQUISICIУN Y APRENDIZAJE DE UNA LENGUA EXTRANJERA: FRANCЙS
Titulaciуn
Departamento
Maestro-Especialidad en Lengua Extranjera (Francйs) Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 2
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 4
Teуricos 2,5
Prбcticos Aula 1,5
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ -Conocer las bases teуricas que fundamentan el aprendizaje de una L.E -Relacionar teorнa y prбctica en actividades puntuales dirigidas a la enseсanza/aprendizaje del francйs para niсos de 6 a 12 aсos __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ 1-THEORIES SUR L ACQUISITION DE LA L.M./RAPPORTS AVEC L APPRENTISSAGE DES L.L.E.E. 2-THEORIES SUR L ACQUISITION DES L.L.E.E. 3-APPRENTISSAGE D UNE L.E: FACTEURS QUI INFLUENT SUR L APPRENTISSAGE. 4-PSYCHOPEDAGOGIE ET APPRENTISSAGE DES L.L.E.E.(I) 5-PSYCHOPEDAGOGIE ET APPRENTISSAGE (II) 6-L ENSEIGNEMENT PRECOCE D UNE L.E. 7-PRATIQUES D ACTIVITЙS DANS TOUS LES CONTENUS DU PROGRAMME __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ - Examen escrito -Lectura y comentario de artнcuos referidos a los contenidos del programa -Prбcticas en cada uno de los bloques de contenidos del programa __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ -KLEIN, W.(1989): Lacquisition de L. E, Armand Colin, Paris MUСOZ LICERAS, J (1992). La adquisiciуn de las lenguas extranjeras, Madrid, Visor -NARCY, P.(1990): Apprendre une L.E., Les Editions dOrganisation. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ. Luz Oyуn Baсales
70
Programas 2010/2011
1112004
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
1112004 LITERATURA INFANTIL EN IDIOMA EXTRANJERO: FRANCЙS
Titulaciуn
Departamento
Maestro-Especialidad en Lengua Extranjera (Francйs) Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 3
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Teуricos 4,5
Prбcticos Aula 1,5
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ - Introducir al alumno en la Literatura infantil, en sus gйneros, estructuras y modelos de anбlisis. - Introducir al alumno en los recursos y estrategias para la utilizaciуn de la literatura infantil en el aula. - Que el alumno conozca los cuentos tradicionales franceses y otros modelos diferentes. - Que el alumno sepa utilizar en clase cuentos y comptines, recursos valiosos para la enseсanza/ aprendizaje de la L.E. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ 1. Dйlimitation de la notion de littйrature enfantine. 2. Caractйristiques, genres et fonctions de la littйrature enfantine. 3. Formes du conte traditionnel: tradition orale et йcrite. Mйcanismes de loralitй et de lйcrit. Raconter un conte. 4. Le conte et le mythe. Diffйrences entre le mythe et le conte merveilleux. Motifs mythiques devenus contes. 5. Йtudes mйthodologiques: les modиles morphologique et psychanalytique. Analyse des contes daprиs les modиles. 6. Йtude du conte traditionnel (merveilleux): - Dйfinition - Classification - Structure - Йtude sйmantique - Valeurs. 7. Les contes de Perrault: Lauteur et son art. Йtude et commentaire des Contes du temps passй. 8. Les illustrations dans les livres pour enfants. Aperзu historique. Fonctions de lillustration. Schиma danalyse dune illustration. Quelques exemples dillustration. Les objets magiques: Classement et fonctions. Utilisation des objets magiques. 9. Les comptines et sa valeur. Utilisation des comptines en classe de L.E. Quelques exemples. 10. Autres modиles de contes pour enfants: Analyse formelle des albums. Structure des contes. Les thиmes transversaux. Quelques exemples dutilisation en classe de L.E. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Evaluaciуn continua a travйs de la participaciуn en clase. Evaluaciуn de trabajos prбcticos concerniendo los temas. Evaluaciуn final de la parte teуrica mediante un examen escrito. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ ALBOUY, P. , Mythes et mythologies dans la littйrature franзaise. Paris, A. Colin, 1969. BETTELHEIM, B., Psychanalyse des contes des fйes. 1980. FRANZ, M,-L. von, Linterprйtation des contes de fйes. Paris. La Fontaine de Pierre, 1980. KRAPPE, A. H., La genиse des mythes. Paris, Payot, 1952. LIDA DE MALKIEL, M. R., El cuento popular y otros ensayos. Buenos Aires, Losada, 1963. PROPP, V., Morphologie du conte. Paris, Seuil. TAMЙS, R. L., Introducciуn a la literatura infantil. Universidad de Santander, 1985.
71
Programas 2010/2011 Danset. Lйger J., Lenfant et les images de la littйrature enfantine. P. Mardaga, Liиge, 1988 Perrault Ch., Contes. Classiques Jeunesse, 1992. Soriano M., Les contes de Perrault, culture savante et traditions populaires. Gallimard, 1968. (La bibliografнa se completarб en clase con cada uno de los temas). Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ. Jesъs Salinero Cascante y MЄ. Josй Bonachнa Caballero 72
Programas 2010/2011
203 Licenciado en Enologнa
73
Programas 2010/2011
2033009
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2033009 FRANCЙS TЙCNICO
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Enologнa
Tipo de Asignatura Op
Curso 2cl
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 4,5
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 1,5
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ Iniciar al alumno al conocimiento del vocabulario, expresiones y textos en lengua francesa, especнficos del mundo de la viticultura y la enologнa. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ 1. Estudio y prбctica de aspectos generales de lengua francesa. 2. Vocabulario y expresiones especнficas del mundo del vino, en los siguientes бmbitos: a). Producciуn agrнcola b). Elaboraciуn del vino c). Cata 3. Lectura, comprensiуn y traducciуn de textos en francйs relativos al mundo del vino. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ - Examen fundamentalmente prбctico sobre los contenidos del programa. Йste constarб de tres partes, en consonancia con los tres grandes bloques en que se organizan los contenidos de la materia: Prueba sobre francйs genйrico. Prueba sobre lйxico especнfico. Traducciуn, del francйs al espaсol, de textos especializados. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ CADIAU, Catherine (1998): Lexivino = Lexivin = Lexiwine. Pernand-Vergelesses: C. et P. Cadiau, CANTERA, Jesъs y DE VICENTE, Eugenio: Gramбtica francesa. Madrid: Cбtedra. 1986. DEBUIGNE, Gйrard: Dictionnaire des vins. Parнs: Larousse, 1991. ESCARPIT, Denise [et al.] (1993): La vigne et le vin: eurolexique: franзais, english, espaсol, deutsch, italiano, portuguйs. Burdeos: Presses Universitaires de Bordeaux. LABASCOULE, Josiane, LAUSE, Christian y ROYER, Corinne (2005): Rond Point. 1. Mйthode de franзais basйe sur lapprentissage par les tвches. Barcelona: Difusiуn-Franзais Langue Йtrangиre, Centro de Investigaciуn y de Publicaciones de Idioma; Grenoble: Presses Universitaires de Grenoble. La Vinification: vocabulaire. Commission des Communautйs Europйennes, Bruselas: Terminologie et applications informatiques. 1985. Lexique de la vigne et du vin. Parнs: Office International de la Vigne et du Vin. 1963. NAVARRE, Colette y LANGLADE, Franзoise (2002): LOEnologie. Parнs: Tec & Doc. PEYNAUD, Йmile y BLOUIN, Jacques (1996): Le goыt du vin. Parнs: Dunod. PEYNAUD, Йmile (1987): El gusto del vino. Madrid: Mundi-Prensa. RENOUIL, Yves (ed.): Dictionnaire du vin. Boulogne: Sйzame. 1988. REYNIER, Alain (2000): Manuel de viticulture: guide technique du viticulteur. Parнs: Tec & Doc. REYNIER, Alain (2002): Manual de viticultura: guнa tйcnica de viticultura. Madrid: Mundi-Prensa.
75
Programas 2010/2011 RIBЙREAU-GAYON, Jean [et al.] (1972-1977): Sciences et techniques du vin: traitй doenologie. 4 vols. Parнs: Dunod. RIBЙREAU-GAYON, Jean [et al.] (1980-1983): Tratado de enologнa: ciencias y tйcnicas del vino. 4 vols. Buenos Aires: Hemisferio Sur. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Ignacio Iсarrea Las Heras 76
Programas 2010/2011 205 Licenciado en Filologнa Inglesa 77
Programas 2010/2011
2051001
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2051001 HISTORIA DE LA LITERATURA FRANCESA
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 1
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
Se pretende introducir al alumno en las principales tendencias, movimientos y autores de la Literatura Francesa. El curso de Literatura Francesa consta de dos partes: una teуrica (programa teуrico) y otra prбctica (lecturas y comentarios). La lectura se efectuarб sobre un conjunto de obras literarias correspondientes a los autores estudiados. Dada su importancia, su lectura es obligatoria para presentarse al examen final. El comentario de textos versarб sobre un extracto de uno de los libros de lectura.
__P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________
Edad Media 1. La lнrica cortйs: Gйneros. Trovadores. FinґAmors. Tйcnica poйtica. 2. La narrativa cortesana: Caracterнsticas. Bйroul y Thomas: Tristбn e Iseo. Chrйtien de Troyes: El Caballero de la Carreta. Renacimiento- Siglo XVIII 3. Franзois Rabelais: Gargantua y Pantagruel. 4. El siglo de las luces. La novela y el cuento filosуfico: Voltaire: Cбndido. La novela epistolar: Laclos: Las amistades peligrosas. Siglo XIX 5 El Realismo: presupuestos teуricos. Flaubert: Madame Bovary.
__L_E__C__T_U__R_A__Y__C__O__M__E_N__T_A__R_I_O__L__IT__E_R__A_R__I_O________________________________________________________
1. Tristan e Iseo. (trad. en Alianza o Cбtedra). 2. Chrйtien de Troyes: Le chevalier de la charrette en Les romans de la Table Ronde. Folio. (Trad. El caballero de la carreta. Ed. de Luis Alberto de Cuenca y Carlos Garcнa Gual). Alianza.32. 3. Rabelais: Gargantua Folio. (Trad. esp. Alianza y Taurus). 4. Voltaire: Candide en Romans et Contes. Garnier-Flammarion. (Trad. Esp. Cбndido. Micromegas. Zadig (ed. de Elena Diego). Cбtedra. Tambiйn Cбndido en Alianza. 5. Flaubert: Madame Bovary. Gallimard, "Folio". (Trad. esp. de Mario Vargas Llosa. Taurus o de Consuelo Berges. Cбtedra).
__S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Examen final que constarб de una parte teуrica (preguntas del temario) y una parte prбctica (comentario literario sobre un texto correspondiente a una de las lecturas del curso). La parte teуrica computarб el 60 %, mientras que la prбctica el 40% del total del examen.
__B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ AA. VV.: Introduction a la vie littйraire de... (6 vols.) Paris. Bordas. 1.968-1970. AA. VV.: Narrativa francesa del siglo XVIII. Madrid, UNED, 1988. ABRAHAM, P. y DESNE R. (dirs.): Histoire Littйraire de la France (7 vols.). Eds. Sociales. 1965-82. BAJTIN, M.: La cultura popular en la Edad Media y en el Renacimiento . Barcelona. Barral. 1.974. CAXTEX, P. G.: Micromйgas, Candide, LIngenu de Voltaire. Paris. CDU/SEDES, 1977.
79
Programas 2010/2011 COHEN, G.: La vida literaria en la Edad Media . Madrid. F.C.E. 1.983. ESPINA, A.: Voltaire y el siglo XVIII. Madrid, Jъcar, 1974. GARCIA GUAL, C.: Primeras novelas europeas. Barcelona, Itsmo. Historia de la Literatura Francesa. Cбtedra. LAGARDE, A. y MICHARD, L.: La littйrature franзaise (5 vols.). Paris. Bordas-Laffont. 1970-2. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ. Jesъs Salinero Cascante 80
Programas 2010/2011
2051002
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2051002 LENGUA INGLESA I
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 1
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ This is the first of six sequential coordinated courses in English Philology that continue to proficiency level (English VI). Students of English I will be expected to learn, internalize, and use correct pronunciation, rhythm, and intonation. To receive an excellent foundation in all four skills of the language (listening, speaking, reading, and writing) is the major goal for this course which begins the students preparation towards the First Certificate level of the Cambridge examination. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ Basic daily class work will be based on units 1-7 of the course Book First Certificate of the Gold series by Richard Acklam et al. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ There will be a final examination with the following components: grammar and vocabulary, dictation, reading comprehension, composition, oral interview at teachers option, and listening. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Coursebooks: Richard Acklam & Sally Burgess. 2000. First Certificate Gold Coursebook. London: Longman. (Units 1-7). Reference Books: Eastwood, J. 1992. Oxford Practice Grammar, Oxford: Oxford University Press. Greenbaum, S. & R. Quirk, R. 1992. A Students Grammar of the English Language. London: Longman. Greenbaum, S. & R. Quirk. 1985. A Comprehensive Grammar of the English Language. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Hewings, M. 1999. Advanced Grammar in Use. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Leech, G. & J. Svartvik. 1995. A Communicative Grammar of English. London: Longman Murphy, R. 1994. English Grammar in Use. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Swan, M.1995. Practical English Usage. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Thomson, A. J. & Martinet, A.V. 1989. A Practical English Grammar. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Vince, M. 1996. First Certificate Language Practice. Oxford: MacMillan. Websters Third New International Dictionary. Chicago: Merria Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Roberto Torre Alonso.
81
Programas 2010/2011
2051004
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2051004 LITERATURA INGLESA I
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 1
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ This course is designed as an introduction to British and North-American literature from the end of the First World War up to the present moment. The course offers a panoramic view of the main currents and most representative authors of the period and introduces students to the detailed analysis of literary texts. At the end of the course students must: a) have a general knowledge of the main currents, authors, and works of the period under analysis, b) be able to apply some basic tools for textual analysis, c) be able to exchange critical opinions and comments on the literary works selected. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ I. Introduction. II. Contemporary fiction: theory and practice. 1. Contemporary British fiction: 1.1. British fiction of the 30s and 40s. 1.2. The 50s in Britain: the "Angry Young Men". 1.3. The British novel from the 60s to the present: 1.3.1. The legacy of modernism. 1.3.2. Women writers. 1.3.3. The combination of experiment with traditional forms: 1.3.3.1. Post-existentialist writers. 1.3.3.2. The "campus" novel. 1.3.3.3. The younger generation of male writers. 1.3.4. Writing from the margins: 1.3.4.1. Feminist fiction. 1.3.4.2. Postcolonial fiction. 2. Contemporary North-American fiction: 2.1. From the "Lost Generation" and the "Jazz Age" to the "Great Depression". 2.2. The 30s, 40s, and 50s in North-American fiction. 2.2.1. Proletarian writers. 2.2.2. Black fiction. 2.2.3. Jewish fiction. 2.3. The 60s and 70s: 2.3.1. Factual writing. 2.3.2. Auto-reflective fiction. 2.4. The 80s and after III. Contemporary theatre: an outline. IV. Contemporary poetry: an outline. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ At the end of the semester students will have to sit for a written examination. The exam will consist of a theoretical part, in which students will have to answer several questions on the contents of the syllabus, and a practical part, in which they will be asked to recognise and analyse several fragments extracted from the compulsory readings below.
82
Programas 2010/2011 Students will have access to the necessary materials for the written examination in the Aula Virtual and the university library. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Compulsory readings Students must read the following works of fiction: 1. "Moral Fibre" (1958), by Kingsley Amis. 2. "An Outing" (1968), by Edna O'Brien. 3. The Passion (1987), by Jeanette Winterson. 4. "The Firebird's Nest" (1999), by Salman Rushdie. 5. "An Alcoholic Case" (1937), by Francis Scott Fitzgerald 6. "The Persistence of Desire" (1962), by John Updike 7. The Bluest Eye (1970), by Toni Morrison. 8. "The Management of Grief" (1988), by Bharati Mukherjee. Books - Hawthorn, Jeremy. 1992. Studying the Novel. An Introduction. 1985. London, New York, Melbourne, Auckland: Edward Arnold. This book introduces the student to the analysis of narrative texts in a very clear and accessible manner. It adopts a narratological approach and explains the different elements that should be taken into consideration when studying any narrative, showing the multiple implications that certain apparently meaningless choices may have. A good amount of examples is provided to illustrate the theoretical points. - Innes, C. 1992. Modern British Drama. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. This book provides a detailed discussion of the major contemporary British dramatists and of their plays. It provides valuable information on the social and political environment surrounding the production and critical reception of plays. Naturalistic social drama, comedy, poetic or symbolist drama and feminist theatre are key elements explored in the book. It also contains a comprehensive chronology, illustrations from significant productions of plays and reference lists of playwrights and works. - Bloom, Clive, ed. 1995. American Drama. Houndmills, Basingstoke, Hampshire and London: Macmillan Press Ltd. This is a comprehensive introduction to American contemporary drama. It contains detailed but clear information on the main dramatists of the twentieth century, starting in 1900, a date which is seen as the origins of American drama, and expanding to the 1990s. The book is structured by authors and contains a wide selection of examples from their most significant plays. - Bradbury, M. 1993. The Modern British Novel. London: Secker & Warburg. This is a stimulating and enjoyable book which delivers an overview of the evolution of the novel in Britain. Its approach is basically historical and centres on the complex network of connections underlying the different movements, genres and works. It includes references to major names but also to writers that are less known but deserve a place in the history of twentieth-century British fiction. Chapter 4 onwards will constitute a basic tool for students of this subject. - Richard J. Lane, ed. 2002. Contemporary British Fiction. Polity Press. This collection of essays complements the previous book since it deals comprehensively with British fiction from 1979 to the present. It groups contemporary British fiction and its most representative authors thematically and pays special attention to key issues such as the relationship between myth and history, the city, cultural identity, gender and postcolonialism. - Cunliffe, M, ed. 1993. American Literature since 1900. The Penguin History of Literature vol. 9. 1975. Harmondsworth: Penguin. This book is part of The Penguin History of Literature. It constitutes a fairly comprehensive approach to the different aspects of American literature that will be analysed in class, namely poetry, theatre and fiction. It includes a wide selection of quotations that illustrate the theoretical aspects under discussion. 83
Programas 2010/2011 - Massa, A. 1994. Forked Tongues? Comparing Twentieth-Century British and American Literature. London: Routledge. This book carries out a comparative study of twentieth-century British and American literature. It compares and contrasts both literatures and considers both the way they influence each other and what distinguishing features they each possess. Chapter 3 is especially significant for the study of British and American drama; chapters 4 and 8 are fairly interesting for the analysis of British and American poetry; chapters 6, 11, and 18 are highly recommended for the comparative study of British and American fiction. Internet links - Internet for English. http://www.vts.rdn.ac.uk/tutorial/english/index.htm This website should be one of the first steps a student can take when attempting to use the Internet to study literature written in English. This tutorial, with exercises to practice, was originally created by Stuart Lee and Grazyna Cooper, and was updated by Kate Lindsay, all of them from the University of Oxford. - Voice of the Shuttle http://vos.ucsb.edu/index.asp A project which started as an individual enterprise, that of Alan Liu in 1994, and which now is one of the best links for the humanities in the English-speaking world. Its base is located at the English Department of the University of California, Santa Barbara. - Outline of Twentieth Century American and British Poetry. A guide to twentieth century literature from literaryhistory.com http://www.literaryhistory.com/20thC/20CAmericanandBritish.htm It allows the viewer to have access to a variety of sources on different authors. It consists of a selection of critical and scholarly articles which can be read for free. The website is kept by Jan Pridmore since 1998. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Mar Asensio Arуstegui 84
Programas 2010/2011
2051007
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2051007 LENGUA FRANCESA I
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 1
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ -Adquirir las competencias definidas como nivel A1 de comunicaciуn dentro del marco europeo de referencia para el aprendizaje de lenguas extranjeras. -Adquirir los conocimientos culturales, lйxicos, gramaticales y comunicativos necesarios para participar con йxito en бmbitos variados de la vida social. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ -Nociones, actos de habla, contenidos gramaticales y culturales necesarios para alcanzar con йxito un nivel A1 de competencias orales y escritas dentro del marco de referencia europeo para el aprendizaje de lenguas. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Un examen que constarб de tres partes: - A) Evaluaciуn de las destrezas orales (comprensiуn y expresiуn oral). - B) Evaluaciуn de destrezas escritas (gramбtica y producciуn escrita) - C) Evaluaciуn de la Comprensiуn Escrita a partir de las lecturas que se seсalan en la bibliografнa __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ -Connexions nє 1: mйthode de franзais et cahier d exercices con vнdeo y CD incorporado. -Robert, P :Micro-Robert : dictionnaire du franзais primordial. -Garcнa Pelayo y Gross Ramуn : Larousse moderno francйs-espaсol. -Abry, D. y Chalaron, M.L.: La grammaire des premiers temps. - Lectures en Franзais facile: Voyage au Centre de la Terre/Une vie, Ed. Clй Internationale. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ Luz Oyуn Baсales
85
Programas 2010/2011
2051008
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2051008 LENGUA INGLESA II
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 1
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ The aim of this course is to provide the student with comprehensive competence in listening, speaking, reading, and writing. At the end of this course the students should have attained the level required to pass the Cambridge First Certificate in English. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ The theoretical and practical approach will be based on units 8-15 of the course book First Certificate of the Gold series by Richard Acklam et al. The students will be required to read the following text: Rebecca by Daphne Du Maurier. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ There will be a final examination with most, or all, of the following components: dictation, reading comprehension, composition, listening, review of compulsory readings, grammar exercises, vocabulary exercises, and oral interview if necessary. To achieve a passing grade in this examination each section should obtain at least the minimum passing score. To pass the course the minimum passing grade (5 points out of ten) should be achieved in this final written examination, as well as in the oral examination. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Coursebooks: Acklam, Richard & Sally Burgess (2000) First Certificate Gold Coursebook. London: Longman. (Units 8-15). Hopkins, Andy & Jocelyn Potter eds. 1986. Daphne Du Maurier, Rebecca. Penguin London: Longman. Reference Books: Eastwood, J. 1992. Oxford Practice Grammar, Oxford: Oxford University Press. Greenbaum, S. & R. Quirk, R. 1992. A Students Grammar of the English Language. London: Longman. Greenbaum, S. & R. Quirk. 1985. A Comprehensive Grammar of the English Language. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Hewings, M. 1999. Advanced Grammar in Use. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Leech, G. & J. Svartvik. 1995. A Communicative Grammar of English. London: Longman Murphy, R. 1994. English Grammar in Use. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Swan, M.1995. Practical English Usage. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Thomson, A. J. & Martinet, A.V. 1989. A Practical English Grammar. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Vince, M. 1996. First Certificate Language Practice. Oxford: MacMillan. Websters Third New International Dictionary. Chicago: Merriam. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Julieta Ojeda Alba
86
Programas 2010/2011
2051010
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2051010 LITERATURA INGLESA II
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 1
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ This course is aimed at offering a detailed analysis of the different literary movements, currents of thought, and particular conditions of the country which promoted the creation of American literature. Our study covers the most significant productions in romance, novel, short story and poetry from 1850 to the beginning of the 20th century. Relevant implications engaged in concepts such as genre, European and home traditions, realism, naturalism and humor will be illustrated in the selected works. Information pertaining the perspectives of the different literary currents produced in Europe and in America in the second half of the nineteenth century will help students to appreciate the interplay between originality and tradition. Each literary work will be analyzed from the standpoint of the critical system which can be best account for its specificity. Learning how to interpret - and not learning interpretations - will be the main aim of this course. The course's website provides students with handouts and summaries for each section of the program, all the literary texts under study, bibliographical references as well as links to other webs which offer information about American society and history and advice on academic writing. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ 1. America as Myth. Deconstructing the idea of the European discovery of America. Readings: Excerpts included in the handouts. 2. The romance and the novel in American literature. Readings: Excerpts included in the handouts. 3. The short story and the novel. The American short story. Readings: Ambrose Bierce "An Occurrence at Owl Creek Bridge" Stephen Crane "The Bride Comes to Yellow Sky" Jack London "To Build a Fire" Sarah Orne Jewett "Aunt Cynthy Dallett" 4. Henry James. Readings: Washington Square (1881) 5. The poetry of Walt Whitman Readings: A selection of poems from Leaves of Grass (1855): 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 52. 6. The poetry of Emily Dickinson: Readings: The poems "There's a Certain Slant of Light", "I like a Look of Agony", "Iґm Nobody! Who are you?" 7. Realism: Mark Twain Readings: The following chapters from Mark Twain's The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn (1884): 1, 2, 3, 8, 11, 15, 20, 35, 43.
87
Programas 2010/2011 __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ A written exam in which students will be asked to comment on the ideological and textual characteristics of one or some of the literary texts or documents which form part of the course contents. Final exam: 100 % of the final grade. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ -Atkins, Graham & Walsh, Chris & Watkins, Susan. 1995. Studying Literature: A Practical Introduction. N.Y.: Harvester/Wheatsheaf. - Baym, Nina, et al. Eds. 1989. The Norton Anthology of American Literature. N.Y.: Norton - Bercovith, Sacvan. Ed. 1997. The Cambridge History of American Literature.Cambridge: Cambridge U P -Chase, Richard. 1980. The American Novel and Its Tradition. Baltimore: The Johns Hopkins U P. -Coyle, Martin et al. Eds. 1991. Encyclopedia of Literature and Criticism. London:Routledge. -Cunliffe, Marcus. 1986. The Literature of the United States.Harmondsworth: Penguin. -Elliot, Emory. Ed. 1988. Columbia Literary History of the United States. N.Y.:Columbia U P - ____ . 1991. The Columbia History of the American Novel. N. Y.:Columbia U P - Jones, Maldwyn A. 1996. The Limits of Liberty: American History 1607-1992. Oxford: Oxford U P - Furnish, Tom & Bath, Michael. 1996. Reading Poetry: An Introduction. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall. - Guerin, Wilfred. 1992. A Handbook of Critical Approaches to Literature. N.Y.: Oxford U P - Hart, James D. 1995. The Oxford Companion to AmericanLiterature. N.Y.: Oxford U P -Hoffman, Michael & Murhphy, Patrick. Eds. 1988. Essentials ofthe Theory of Fiction. Durham and London: Duke U P - Pattee, F.L. 1975. The Development of the American Short Story: A Historical Survey. N.Y.: Harper & Brothers - Pizer, Donald. Ed. 1995. The Cambridge Companion to American Realism andNaturalism: From Howells to London. Cambridge: Cambridge U P -Preminger, Alex & Brogan, T.V. F. Eds. 1993. The New Princeton Encyclopedia of Poetry and Poetics. Princeton: Princeton U P -Reynolds, David S. 1988. Beneath the American Renaissance: The Subversive Imagination in the Age of Emerson and Melville. Cambridge: Harvard U P - Walker, Marshall. 1988. MacMillan History of Literature: The Literature of the United States. Houndsmills: MacMillan. JOURNALS: - AmericanLliterature: A Journal of Literary History, Criticism, and Bibliography; -Contemporary Literary Criticism; -New literary History; - Nineteenth-Century Literature Criticism; -Studies in American Fiction; -Studies in Short Fiction. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ. Jesъs Hernбez Lerena 88
Programas 2010/2011
2051013
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2051013 LENGUA INGLESA III
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 2
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ The aim of this course is to enable students to acquire a post-First Certificate level of English in Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing. The course is designed to encourage the development of the skills required by students progressing towards Proficiency, with the emphasis very much on real-world tasks. This course places special emphasis on listening comprehension skills. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ The coursebook will be completed with extra material related to the following activities: use of grammar, translation, comprehension of a variety of non-literary texts, etc. Hand-outs with texts, translations, and exercises will be available at the library and at the secretary's office. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ There will be an exam which will contain these two parts: 1. Some written exercises: a) A written composition (200-250 words) and b) Vocabulary and grammar exercises (some of which may be reading comprehension and/or translation). 2. A listening comprehension exercise. Note: The composition and the listening exercise have to be passed separately for a final pass in the course. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Coursebook: Acklam, Richard and Burgess, Sally. Advanced Gold Coursebook. Longman GRAMMAR ALEXANDER, L. G. 1988. Longman English Grammar. Longman. BALL, W. J. 1986. Dictionary of English Grammar Based on Common Errors. Macmillan. BROUGHTON, Geoffrey. 1990. The Penguin English Grammar A-Z: For Advanced Students. Oxford University Press. CHALKER, Sylvia. 1996. The Oxford Dictionary of English Grammar. Oxford University Press. ECKERSLEY, C.E. 1972. A Comprehensive English Grammar: For Foreign Students. Longman. GREENBAUM, Sidney. 1993. A Students Grammar of the English Language. Longman. HEWINGS, Martin. 1999. Advanced Grammar in Use: a Self-Study Reference and Practice book for Advanced Learners of English. Cambridge University Press. HUDDLESTON, Rodney. 1996. English Grammar: An Outline. Cambridge University Press. LEECH, Geoffrey N. 1975. A Communicative Grammar of English. Longman. ________________ . 1989. An A-Z of English Grammar and Usage. Edward Arnold. LOW, Ona. 1988. Grammar for Everyday Use. Collins. MURPHY, Raymond. 1999. English Grammar in Use: A Self-Study Reference and Practice Book for Intermediate Students. Cambridge University Press. NEUMAN, D. M. 1980. English Grammar for Proficiency. Nelson. SHEPHERD, John. 1984. Ways to Grammar: A Modern English Practice Book. Macmillan.
89
Programas 2010/2011 SWAN, Michael. 1986. Practical English Usage. Oxford University Press. _____________ . 1997. How English Works: A Grammar Practice Book. Oxford University Press. THOMSON, A. J. 1986. A Practical English Grammar. Oxford University Press. COMPOSITION CHAPMAN, L. R. N. 1970. English Composition Lessons. Longman. COE, Norman. 1986. Writing Skills: A Problem-Solving Approach for Upper-Intermediate and More Advanced Students. Cambridge University Press. IMHOOF, Maurice.1984. From Paragraph to Essay: Developing Composition Writing. Longman. INGRAM, Beverley. 1988. From Writing to Composing: An Introductory Composition Course for Students of English. Cambridge University Press. FOWLER, W. S. 1989. Progressive Writing Skills. Nelson. MOTT, Brian. 1985. La Composiciуn Escrita en Inglйs: Mйtodo y Ejercicios Gramaticales. Universitat. SPEAKING ENGLISH DE FREITAS, J. F. 1974. To Start You Talking: English Conversation Practice for Foreign Learners. Macmillan. DIXON, Robert J. 1988. Exercises in English: Conversation. Alianza. LOW, Ona. 1977. Speak English Fluently. Edward Arnold. ROBINSON, Carole. 1991. Themes for Listening and Speaking. Oxford University Press. ROGERSON, Pamela. 1993-5. Speaking Clearly: Pronunciation and Listening Comprehension for Learners of English. Cambridge University Press. TANNEN, Deborah. 1995. Talking from 9 to 5: How womenґs and menґs conversational styles affects who gets heard, who gets credit, and what gets done at work. Virago. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ. Jesъs Hernбez Lerena. 90
Programas 2010/2011
2051014
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2051014 LITERATURA INGLESA III
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 2
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ Estudiar la literatura inglesa victoriana y del comienzo del Modernismo, combinando la metodologнa propia de la historia literaria con el comentario crнtico de las obras propuestas como lecturas obligatorias. Se valorarб la participaciуn activa del alumno en el desarrollo de la clase. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ 1) Historical background: Great Britain in the Victorian period. 2) An introduction to the Victorian novel. 3) Charles Dickens. Hard Times. 4) Victorian Poetry: Lord Tennyson, Robert Browning, Elizabeth Barrett Browning, Matthew Arnold. 5) George Eliot. Silas Marner. 6) The late Victorians: Stevenson, Kipling. Thomas Hardy. "An Imaginative Woman" 7) Aestheticism. Sources and influences. Oscar Wilde. The Importance of Being Earnest. 8) Detective fiction. Stories from Conan Doyle and Chesterton. 9) The Turn of the century. Joseph Conrad. 10) Modernism: General Features. Short stories by Virginia Woolf and James Joyce. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__D__E__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__E__N__L_A__B_O__R__A_T__O__R_I_O__Y__C__A_M__P__O___________________________________ Se dedicarбn las sesiones correspondientes al comentario de lecturas obligatorias segъn el calendario que se facilitarб a los alumnos en clase. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ - Examen escrito final de carбcter teуrico-prбctico. - Opcionalmente, se puede liberar la parte prбctica (50 % del examen final) a lo largo del cuatrimestre de docencia con la participaciуn en los comentarios de las lecturas obligatorias por medio de trabajos escritos y exposiciones orales en clase. __L_E__C__T_U__R_A__S__O__B_L__IG__A__T_O__R_I_A__S___________________________________________________________________ - Charles Dickens: Hard Times - George Eliot: Silas Marner - Thomas Hardy: "An Imaginative Woman" - Oscar Wilde: The Importance of Being Earnest - Stories by Conan Doyle (Sherlock Holmes) and Chesterton (Father Brown) - Stories by V. Woolf and James Joyce - Bernard Shaw: Pygmalion __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Gale Research. Dictionary of Literary Biography ALLEN, Walter (1954:1970) The English Novel, Harmondsworth: Penguin. BARNARD, Robert (1994) A Short History of English Literature, Oxford.
91
Programas 2010/2011 BERGONZI, Bernard (1986) The myth of modernism and twentieth century literature, Brighton: Harvester. BLAMIRES, H. (1982: 1986) Twentieth-Century Literature, Macmillan History of Literature Series, Macmillan. BRADBURY, Malcolm & McFARLANE, James eds. (1976) Modernism. 1890-1930, Hamondsworth: Penguin. BRADFORD, Richard ed. (1996)Introducing Literary Studies, London: Prentice Hall / Harvester Wheatsheaf. CARTER, Ronald & McRAE, John (1997) The Routledge History of Literature in English. Britain & Ireland, London: Routledge. COX, C.B. & DYSON, A.E. eds. (1972) The Twentieth Century Mind, London: Oxford University Press. DAICHIES, David (1960: 1968) A Critical History of English Literature, 4 vols. London: Secker & Warburg. FAULKNER, Peter (1990) Modernism, London ; New York : Routledge. FAULKNER, Peter ed. (1989) A Victorian Reader, London: Batsford. FORD, Boris ed. (1982) From Dickens to Hardy. The New Pelican Guide to English Literature, vol. 6. Harmondsworth: Penguin. FORD, Boris ed. (1990) From James to Eliot. The New Pelican Guide to English Literature, vol. 7. Harmondsworth: Penguin. GILMOUR, Robin (1993) The Victorian Period: the Intellectual and Cultural Context of English Literature, London: Longman. GILLIE, Christopher (1975) Movements in English Literature 1900-1940, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. GRANT, Damian (1985) Realism, London; New York: Methuen. HIDALGO, Pilar & ALCARAZ, Enrique (1992) La literatura inglesa en los textos, Alcoy: Marfil. HORSMAN, A. (1990) The Victorian Novel, Oxford History of English Literature, vol. 13, Oxford: Oxford University Press. IAСEZ PAREJA, Eduardo (1993) Historia de la literatura: Volumen 8. El siglo XX, La nueva literatura, Barcelona: Tesys/ Bosch. JENKINS, Alice & JOHN, Juliet eds.(2000) Rereading victorian fiction, Houndmills; London: MacMillan Press. JOHN, Juliet (2000) Rethinking victorian Culture; foreword by John Sutherland. Houndmills ; London : MacMillan Press, KARL, F.R. (1985) Modern and Modernism, New York: Atheneum. LEAVIS, F.R. (1948) The Great Tradition, Harmondsworth: Penguin. LEVENSON, Michael ed. (1999) The Cambridge companion to modernism, Cambridge: C.U.P. LEWIS, Pericles (2000) Modernism, nationalism and the novel, Cambridge: C.U.P. NADEL, Ira B. and FREDEMAN, William E. eds (1983) Victorian novelists, Detroit ; London : Gale Research. OUSBY, Ian (1993) The Cambridge Guide to Literature in English, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. POLLARD, Arthur ed. (1993) The Victorians, The Penguin History of Literature, vol. 6, Harmondsworth: Penguin. QUINONES, Ricardo J. (1985) Mapping literary modernism : time and developmen, Princeton : Princeton University Press. SCOTT, B.K. ed. (1990) The Gender of Modernism: A Critical Anthology, Bloomington: Indiana University Press. SCHWARTZ, Sanford (1985) The matrix of modernism : Pound, Eliot and early twentieth-century thought, Princeton : Princeton University Press. SMITH, Stan (1994) The Origins of Modernism, New York: Harvester Wheatsheaf. STONYK, Margaret (1983) Ninetieth-Century Literature, Macmillan History of Literature Series, London: Macmillan. SUTHERLAND, John (1995) Victorian Fiction Writers, Publishers, Readers, Hampshire: Macmillan. TRILLING, Lionel & BLOOM, Harold eds. (1973) Victorian Prose and Poetry, New York: Oxford University Press. TUCKER, Herbert F ed. (1999) A companion to victorian literature & culture, Oxford: Blackwell Publishers, 1999 TURNER, Paul (1989) English Literature 1832-1890: Excluding the Novel, The Oxford History of English Literature, Vol. 11, Oxford: Clarendon. WILSON, Edmund (1931: 1979) Axels Castle, London, Fontana. WILLIAMS, Linda R. (1994) The Twentieth Century. From 1900 to the Present Day, London: Bloomsbury. 92
Programas 2010/2011 WILLIAMS, R. (1970) The English Novel: From Dickens to Lawrence, London: Chatto & Windus. RECURSOS DE INTERNET: Recursos de internet: www.victorianweb.org www.en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Victorian_literature www.andromeda.rutgers.edu/~jlynch/Lit/victoria.html www.fortunecity.com/victorian/whistler/23 Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Carlos Villar Flor 93
Programas 2010/2011
2051015
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2051015 LENGUA INGLESA IV
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 2
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ The aims of this course is to enable students to acquire a post-First Certificate level of English in Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing. The courses are designed to encourage the development of the skills required by students progressing towards Proficiency, with the emphasis very much on real-world tasks. At the end of the course, students will be expected to communicate effectively and with ease in everyday contexts and adequately in more abstract contexts. This course will place special emphasis on the writing skills. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ Students will have to meet certain standards in the following skills: 1.Fluency: Minimal hesitation in everyday contexts and coherent presentation of thoughts in all contexts. 2. Grammatical accuracy: Structures adequately controlled and varied in most contexts. 3. Pronunciation: Stress-timing, rhythm, placing of stress, intonation, etc., sufficiently controlled. 4. Interactive communication: Effective communication in most contexts, both actively and receptively. 5. Vocabulary resource: Few vocabulary gaps other than in specialised areas. Hand-outs with texts, translations, and exercises will be available at the library and at the secretary's office. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ There will be an exam which will contain these two parts: 1.Written exercises : a. A written composition (200-250 words). (45% of the written exam grade) b. Reading comprehension, vocabulary, and/or grammar exercises. (55 % of the written exam grade) The composition has to be passed independently from the other exam sections. Note: the percentage for sections a. and b. may vary slightly as it will depend on the degree of difficulty of each exam section. 2. Oral exercises: a. Reading aloud a brief text. (20%) b. An interview with the examiner. (80%) The oral exam will be assessed according to criteria of fluency, pronunciation, correct use of grammar, and intonation. Important notice: The final mark will be the average of the written and the oral exam, both of which have to be passed separately for a final pass. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Coursebook: Acklam, Richard and Burgess, Sally. Advanced Gold Coursebook. Longman GRAMMAR ALEXANDER, L. G. 1988. Longman English Grammar. Longman.
94
Programas 2010/2011 BALL, W. J. 1986. Dictionary of English Grammar Based on Common Errors. Macmillan. BROUGHTON, Geoffrey. 1990. The Penguin English Grammar A-Z: For Advanced Students. Oxford University Press. CHALKER, Sylvia. 1996. The Oxford Dictionary of English Grammar. Oxford University Press. ECKERSLEY, C.E. 1972. A Comprehensive English Grammar: For Foreign Students. Longman. GREENBAUM, Sidney. 1993. A Students Grammar of the English Language. Longman. HEWINGS, Martin. 1999. Advanced Grammar in Use: a Self-Study Reference and Practice book for Advanced Learners of English. Cambridge University Press. HUDDLESTON, Rodney. 1996. English Grammar: An Outline. Cambridge University Press. LEECH, Geoffrey N. 1975. A Communicative Grammar of English. Longman. _________________ . 1989. An A-Z of English Grammar and Usage. Edward Arnold. LOW, Ona. 1988. Grammar for Everyday Use. Collins. MURPHY, Raymond. 1999. English Grammar in Use: A Self-Study Reference and Practice Book for Intermediate Students. Cambridge University Press. NEUMAN, D. M. 1980. English Grammar for Proficiency. Nelson. SHEPHERD, John. 1984. Ways to Grammar: A Modern English Practice Book. Macmillan. SWAN, Michael. 1986. Practical English Usage. Oxford University Press. ______________ . 1997. How English Works: A Grammar Practice Book. Oxford University Press. THOMSON, A. J. 1986. A Practical English Grammar. Oxford University Press. COMPOSITION CHAPMAN, L. R. N. 1970. English Composition Lessons. Longman. COE, Norman. 1986. Writing Skills: A Problem-Solving Approach for Upper-Intermediate and More Advanced Students. Cambridge University Press. IMHOOF, Maurice.1984. From Paragraph to Essay: Developing Composition Writing. Longman. INGRAM, Beverley. 1988. From Writing to Composing: An Introductory Composition Course for Students of English. Cambridge University Press. FOWLER, W. S. 1989. Progressive Writing Skills. Nelson. MOTT, Brian. 1985. La composiciуn escrita en inglйs: Mйtodo y ejercicios gramaticales. Universitat. SPEAKING ENGLISH DE FREITAS, J. F. 1974. To Start You Talking: English Conversation Practice for Foreign Learners. Macmillan. DIXON, Robert J. 1988. Exercises in English: Conversation. Alianza. LOW, Ona. 1977. Speak English Fluently. Edward Arnold. ROBINSON, Carole. 1991. Themes for Listening and Speaking. Oxford University Press. ROGERSON, Pamela. 1993-5. Speaking Clearly: Pronunciation and Listening Comprehension for Learners of English. Cambridge University Press. TANNEN, Deborah. 1995. Talking from 9 to 5: How Womenґs and Menґs Conversational Styles Affects Who Gets Heard, Who Gets Credit, and What Gets Done at Work. Virago. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ. Jesъs Hernбez Lerena 95
Programas 2010/2011
2051016
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2051016 LITERATURA INGLESA IV
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 2
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ This course will provide students with an overview of American Literature starting with colonial times and continuing to the first half of the nineteenth century. A number of texts should be analyzed by students. Authors to be studied extend from John Smith to Edgar Allan Poe. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O__________________________________________________________________________ 1. Colonial America. Under this heading we include a variety of authors: adventurers such as John Smith, historians such as William Bradford, and multigenre authors such as Cotton Mather, etc 2. The new spirit. In this section we will study those authors in whose writings the desire for independence is detected: Benjamin Franklin, Thomas Paine, etc. 3. Independence. Under this heading we include the American authors whose works were written after the countrys independence was established: Washington Irving, James Fenimore Cooper, etc. 4. New Englands Day. In this section we include the first original American authors whose writings were not, as was the practice, a mere copy of European styles: Nathaniel Hawthorne, Edgar Allan Poe, Ralph Waldo Emerson, Henry David Thoreau, etc. 5. The Brahmin Poets and Historians. From this group of aristocratic writers we will discuss the following: Henry Wadsworth Longfellow, James Russell Lowell, etc. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ The course grade will be based exclusively on the final examination and, to obtain a passing grade, at least 5 points out of ten should be achieved in this final written examination The examination will have the following sections: Essay type section: students will have to write one or two short essays based on one or two specific topics in the program. Text identification section: students will have to identify a series of fragments from the plays, novels, and short stories included in the program. Test type section: students will have to respond to a series of specific objective questions about the works and authors included in the program. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ REFERENCE BOOKS: Abel, Darrel. American Literature. Woodbury. Cunliffe, Marcus. American Literature to 1900. Penguin Books. Bercovitch, Sacvan. ed. The Cambridge History of American Literature. Vols I and II. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Buell, L. Literary Transcendentalism. Cornell University Press. Ellman, Richard. The New Oxford Book of American Verse. Oxford University Press. Hall, Donald. American Poetry. Faber and Faber Hutner, Gordon. The American Literary History Reader. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Mathiessen, F. O. American Reinaissance. Oxford University Press. Moore, Geoffrey. The Penguin Book of American Literature
96
Programas 2010/2011 Verse. Penguin Books. Stern, Milton R., & Gross Seymor L. American Literature Survey. Walker, M. The Literature of the United States of America. McMillan History of Literature Series. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Julieta Ojeda Alba 97
Programas 2010/2011
2051017
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2051017 GRAMБTICA INGLESA I
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 3
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 4
Prбcticos Aula 2
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ This course is designed for students who wish to take a further step in the study of English phonetics and phonology. Those taking it are expected to know the basic concepts of general linguistics and phonology, and, more specifically, to have a good command of all the theoretical and practical aspects described in the programs of Fonйtica I and Fonйtica II. Although the approach is theoretical, the day-to-day class has been planned around different practical tasks. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ PART 1. INTRODUCTION 1.1 Theory: Revision of some basic concepts. The vocalic and consonantal systems of English. 1.2 Practice: Phonemic transcription (broad notation). PART 2. PHONETICS 2.1 Auditory, articulatory, acoustic phonetics 2.2 Feature Theory 2.2.1 Definition - The phoneme: from the minimal unit of linguistic analysis to the bundle of distinctive features -Identifying a universal set of distinctive features -Binary oppositions and non-binary oppositions 2.2.2Feature systems - Trubetzkoys system - Jakobson and Halles system - Chomsky and Halles Generative phonology - Ladefogeds Traditional features PART 3. SOUNDS IN CONNECTED SPEECH 3.1 Allophonic transcription: variations in energy, length, voicing, aspiration, release type and place of articulation. 3.2 Revision of other concepts: linking, assimilation, coalescence, elision, etc. 3.3 Practice: Phonetic transcription (narrow notation). __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ The final exam will consist of - A theoretical part in which students will be assessed on several theoretical points included in the programme and - A practical part, which will include phonemic and phonetic transcription __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ - Clark, J. and C. Yallop. 1990. An Introduction to Phonetics and Phonology. Oxford: Blackwell. - Finch, D. and H. Ortiz Lira. 1982. A Course in English Phonetics for Spanish Speakers. London: Heinemman Educational Books.
98
Programas 2010/2011 - Gimson, A.C. 1994. Pronunciation of English. London: Arnold. - Harris, J. 1994. English Sound Structure. Oxford: Blakwell. - Kreidler, C.W. 1989. The Pronunciation of English. A Course Book in Phonology. Oxford: Blackwell. - Lass, R. 1984. Phonology. An Introduction to Basic Concepts. Cambridge: CUP. - Mott, B. 1996. A Course in Phonetics and Phonology for Spanish Learners of English. Barcelona: EUB. - Roach, P. English Phonetics and Phonology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Profesor pendiente de contratar. 99
Programas 2010/2011
2051018
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2051018 LITERATURA INGLESA V
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 3
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 4
Prбcticos Aula 2
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__A__IM__S____________________________________________________________________________________________ The subject matter of this course will be the literature of the eighteenth century and the romantic period. A special emphasis will be given to the literary works which are specified below. The students will be asked to read critically the allotted compulsory reading before they are analysed in class and are also expected to participate actively in class discussions. __S__Y_L_L__A_B__U__S_____________________________________________________________________________________ Unit 0. Introduction Unit 1. Alexander Pope. An Essay on Criticism as a Guide to Augustan Literary Principles. Unit 2. Eighteenth Century Drama. Unit 3. The Age of Satire: Jonathan Swift Unit 4. Origins and Development of the Novel. Unit 5. Daniel Defoe: Robinson Crusoe Unit 6. Samuel Richardson: Pamela Unit 7. Lawrence Sterne: Tristram Shandy. Unit 8.The Novel at the Turn of the Century: Jane Austen. Unit 9. Romantic Poetry (I): Introduction to Romanticism Unit 10. Romantic Poetry (II). First Generation: Blake, Wordsworth and Coleridge. Unit 11. Romantic Poetry (III). Second Generation: Byron, Shelley and Keats. Unit 12. Romantic Fiction: Walter Scott, the Brontлs, Mary Shelley __C__O_M__P__U__L_S_O__R__Y__R_E__A_D__I_N_G__S_____________________________________________________________________ - Pope, Alexander, An Essay on Criticism. - Swift, Jonathan, Gulliver's Travels. - Defoe, Daniel, Robinson Crusoe. - Selected excerpts from: Richardson, Samuel, Pamela. - Selected excerpts from: Sterne, Lawrence, Tristram Shandy. - Austen, Jane, Pride and Prejudice. - Selected poems by the Romantic poets: - W. Blake: Songs of Innocence and Experience - W. Wordsworth: "Lines Written a Few Miles Above Tintern Abbey"; "We are Seven" - S.T.Coleridge: "Dejection: An Ode"; "The Rime of the Ancient Mariner" - P.B.Shelley: "Mont Blanc. Lines Written in the Vale of Chamouni" - J. Keats: "Ode on a Grecian Urn" - Bronte, Emily, Wuthering Heights. - Video Session: - Frankenstein
100
Programas 2010/2011 __A__S_S__E_S__S_M__E_N__T__________________________________________________________________________________ Apart from the written exam the students are expected to submit before the exam takes place a critical essay on a topic agreed on with the teacher beforehand related to the compulsory reading. The essay will have to be typewritten with length around 2.000 words (8-9 pages double space) and must comply with the norms given in class. Exam: 70% Essay: 30% The students must get a passing mark in both the final exam and the critical essay to be given a final passing mark. IMPORTANT NOTE ON PLAGIARISM: Plagiarize: vt. to use and pass off (someone elses ideas, inventions, writings, etc.) as ones own // v.i. to take anothers writings, etc. and pass them off as ones own (Websters Encyclopaedic Dictionary). Document your sources. Using the words of others without appropriate acknowledgement and the appropriate citation methods will be punished with a fail grade (0.0). __R__E_C__O__M_M__E__N_D__E__D__B_I_B__L_I_O_G__R__A_P__H__Y_____________________________________________________________ A) Augustan Period: CLIFFORD, James L. 1977. Eighteenth Century English Literature. Modern Essays in Criticism. Oxford: OUP JACK, Ian. 1978. Augustan Satire. Intention and Idiom in English Poetry, 1660-1750. London; Oxford. ROGERS, Pat. 1974. The Augustan Vision. London; Methuen ROGERS, Pat. 1978. The Context of English Literature. The Eighteenth Century. London; Methuen LONDSDALE, Roger (ed.) 1993. The Penguin History of Literature. Dryden to Johnson. London; Penguin NOVAK, Maximillian E. 1982. Eighteenth Century English Literature. London; MacMillan SKINNER, John.2001. An Introduction to Eighteenth-Century Fiction. Raising the Novel. London; Palgrave WAT, IAN. 1995. The Rise of the Novel. London; The Hogarth Press WILLEY, Basil. 1972. The Eighteenth Century Background. London: Pelican B) Romanticism: ABRAMS, M.H. 1973. Natural Supernaturalism. Tradition and Revolution in Romantic Literature. London; Norton ABRAMS, M.H. 1975. English Romantic Poets. Modern Essays in Criticism. Oxford; Oxford University Press ABRAMS, M.H. 1997. The Mirror and the Lamp. Oxford: OUP BUTLER, Marilyn. 1981. Romantic, Rebels and Reactionaries. English Literature and its Background 1760-1830. Oxford; Oxford University Press COPLEY, S. & WHALE, J. 1992. Beyond Romanticism. New Approaches to Texts and Contexts 1780-1832. London; Routledge CURRAN, S. 1998. The Cambridge Companion to British Romanticism. Cambridge; Cambridge University Press DAY, A.1996. Romanticism. London; Routledge Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Cristina Flores Moreno 101
Programas 2010/2011
2051019
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2051019 HISTORIA DE LA LENGUA INGLESA I
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 3
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 4
Prбcticos Aula 2
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ Esta es la primera parte de un curso de iniciaciуn a la historia de la lengua inglesa cuyo objetivo general es que los alumnos tengan una visiуn panorбmica del inglйs en su vertiente diacrуnica. Mбs concretamente, se pretende que los alumnos (I) se familiaricen con los conceptos de lengua como cambio y lengua como uso; (II) sean capaces de describir los distintos periodos del inglйs (inglйs antiguo, inglйs medio, inglйs moderno) desde el punto de vista fonolуgico, morfosintбctico y semбntico; y (III) comprendan la interrelaciуn entre factores histуricos y culturales y el desarrollo de la lengua inglesa. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ 1. GENERAL INTRODUCTION: Some basic notions about the nature of language. History of the language versus historical linguistics. Language change. 2. THE BACKGROUNDS AND HISTORY OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE: the Indo-European family of languages. The Germanic languages. Main periods in the history of the English Language 3. THE OLD ENGLISH PERIOD: Landmarks, historical, cultural and linguistic background. Problems in the description of the language. 4. OLD ENGLISH PHONETICS AND PHONOLOGY 5. OLD ENGLISH MORPHOLOGY AND SYNTAX 6. OLD ENGLISH LEXICON AND SEMANTICS __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__D__E__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__L_A__B_O__R__A_T__O__R_I_O__Y__C__A_M__P__O___________________________________ Tanto en las sesiones teуricas como en las clases prбcticas, el trabajo en esta asignatura se centra en la discusiуn y el comentario de textos y niveles lingьнsticos. Se anima a los alumnos a tomar parte en las sesiones teуrico-prбcticas. La lengua de las clases, los trabajos de curso y los exбmenes serб el inglйs. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Cada alumno podrб optar por evaluarse de manera continua (A) o por medio de un examen final (B). A. La evaluaciуn continua se basarб en la asistencia a clase (obligatoria en un 85% si se opta por esta modalidad) y en la realizaciуn de un trabajo individual y otro en grupo a determinar durante las primeras semanas de clase. Antes del ъltimo dнa de clase del cuatrimestre se publicarбn las calificaciones de la evaluaciуn continua. Los alumnos que hayan superado esta fase no deberбn presentarse a examen final. La calificaciуn mбxima que se puede obtener por medio de la evaluaciуn continua es de Sobresaliente. Para obtener la calificaciуn de Matrнcula de Honor serб necesario haber obtenido la calificaciуn de Sobresaliente en la evaluaciуn continua y mejorar la calificaciуn en el examen final. B. Los criterios de evaluaciуn del examen final serбn los siguientes: (i) conocimiento y comprensiуn de los tуpicos teуricos de la asignatura; (ii) rigor terminolуgico y precisiуn del lenguaje empleado; (iii) capacidad de comentar y contextualizar los rasgos identificados en los distintos niveles; y (iv) fluidez y correcciуn de la lengua inglesa. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Baugh, A.C. & T. Cable. 1987. A History of the English Language. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul. Berdnt R. 1982. History of the English Language. Leipzig: VEB Verlag Enzyclopadie.
102
Programas 2010/2011 Blommfield, M.W. & L. Newmark. 1963. A Linguistic Introduction to the History of English. New York: A.A. Knopf. Bourcier, G. 1981. An Introduction to the History of the English Language. Cheltenham: S. Thornes. Bourcier, G. 1981. History of the English Language. Cheltenham: S. Thornes. Brook, G.L. 1977. A History of the English Language. London: Cox & Wyman Ltd. Brook, G.L. 1978. An Introduction to Old English. Manchester University Press.Bruce, M. & F.C. Robinson. 1987. A Guide to Old English. Oxford: Basil Blackwell. Campbell, A. 1959. Old English Grammar. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Clark, J.W. 1967. Early English. London: Andre Deutsch.Classen, E. 1969. Outlines of the History of the English Language. New York: Greenwood Press Publishers. Cruz, J. de la. 1983. La prosa de los anglosajones. Mбlaga: Universidad de Mбlaga y Salamanca. Cruz, J. de la. 1986. Iniciaciуn prбctica al inglйs antiguo. Madrid: Alhambra. Donahue D. 1979. Outline of the Growth and Development of the English Language. Roma: Bulzoni. Fernбndez, F. 1986. Historia de la Lengua Inglesa. Madrid: Gredos. Foster, B. 1971. The Changing English Language. Harmondsworth: Penguin. Gardner, F.F. 1971. An Analysis of Syntactic Patterns in Old English. The Hague: Mouton. Jespersen, F. 1986. Growth and Structure of the English Language. Oxford: Basil Blackwell Publisher. Leith, R. 1983. A Social History of English. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul. MacCrum, R. et al. 1986. The Story of English. London: Faber & Faber. MacLaughin, J. 1983. Old English Syntax. Tubingen: Niemeyer. Millward, C. M. 1996. A Biography of the English Language. New York: Harcourt Brace Millward, C. M. 1996. A Coursebook to Accompany a Biography of the English Language. New York: Harcourt Brace. Mitchell, B. 1978. A Guide to Old English. Oxford: Basil Blackwell. Mitchell, B. 1985. Old English Syntax. (2 vol.) Oxford: Clarendon Press. Partridge, A.C.1982. A Companion to Old and Middle English studies. London: Andrй Deutsch. Pei, M. 1953. History of English. London: Allen & Unwin. Potters, S. 1975. Changing English. London: Andrй Deutsch. Pyles, T. & J. Algeo. 1971. English, an Introduction to Language. New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich. Pyles, T. & J. Algeo. 1982. The Origins and Development of the English Language. New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich. Quirk, R. & C. L. Wrenn. 1957. An Old English Grammar. London: Methuen. Quirk, R. 1968. Essays on English Language Medieval and Modern. London: Longman. Stevick, R.D. 1968. English and Its History: The Evolution of a Language. Boston: Allyn & Bacon. Strang, B. 1970. A History of English. London: Methuen. Wardale, E. 1970. And Old English Grammar. London: Methuen. Weekley, E. 1970. The English Language. London: A. Deutsch. Williams, J. 1975. Origins of the English Language. New York: The Free Press. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Roberto Torre Alonso 103
Programas 2010/2011
2051021
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2051021 GRAMБTICA INGLESA II
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 3
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 4,5
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 4,5
Prбcticos Aula 0
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ Tras cursar esta asignatura el alumno serб capaz de hacer un anбlisis sintбctico categorial y funcional de frases, clбusulas y oraciones en inglйs. El trabajo en esta asignatura se centra en la discusiуn de enunciados en lengua inglesa, con йnfasis en la motivaciуn semбntica y pragmбtica de las estructuras sintбcticas. La lengua de las clases, los trabajos de curso y los exбmenes serб el inglйs. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ Unit 1: Morphology: lexical and grammatical categories; inflecional morphology; derivational morphology; compounding; prefixation; affixation. Unit 2: The simplex clause: syntactic categories (the simplex noun phrase; the adjectival phrase; the verbal phrase; the adverbial phrase; the prepositional phrase Unit 3: The simplex clause: syntactic functions (word functions; phrase functions; clause functions). Unit 4: English verb classes and alternations (transitivity alternations, alternations involving arguments within the NP, oblique subject alternations, reflexive diathesis alternations, passive, alternations involving postverbal subjects). Unit 5: The complex clause: coordination (coordinate subject constructions, coordinate constructions with independent subject); subordination (clauses as nouns, clauses as verbs, clauses as adverbs); the complex noun phrase (clauses as adjectives, nominalizations). Unit 6: The syntactic constructions of English: TOUGH-movement, control, raising, anaphora, questions, topicalization, focalization. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Cada alumno podrб optar por evaluarse de manera continua o por medio de un examen final. La evaluaciуn continua se basarб en la asistencia a clase (obligatoria todos los dнas del curso si se opta por esta modalidad) y en la realizaciуn de dos trabajos individuales. Antes del ъltimo dнa de clase del cuatrimestre se publicarбn las calificaciones de la evaluaciуn continua. Los alumnos que hayan superado esta fase no deberбn presentarse a examen final. La calificaciуn mбxima que se puede obtener por medio de la evaluaciуn continua es de Aprobado. Si se ha optado por la evaluaciуn continua, para obtener la calificaciуn de Notable, Sobresaliente o Matrнcula de Honor serб necesario haber obtenido la calificaciуn de Aprobado en la evaluaciуn continua y mejorar la calificaciуn en el examen final. En caso de optar por el examen final, la calificaciуn serб la obtenida en el examen. Los criterios de evaluaciуn del examen final serбn los siguientes: (i) conocimiento y comprensiуn de los tуpicos teуricos de la asignatura; (ii) capacidad de resolver problemas prбcticos de morfosintaxis inglesa; (iii) rigor terminolуgico y precisiуn del lenguaje empleado; (iv) capacidad de argumentar en aspectos de morfosintaxis inglesa; y (v) fluidez y correcciуn de la lengua inglesa. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Levin, B. 1993. English Verb Classes and Alternations. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press. McCawley, J. 1998. The Syntactic Phenomena of English. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press. Van Valin, R. 2001. An Introduction to Syntax. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Van Valin, R. 2005. Exploring the Syntax-Semantics Interface. Cambridge University Press. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Roberto Torre Alonso
104
Programas 2010/2011
2051022
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2051022 LITERATURA INGLESA VI
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 3
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 4
Prбcticos Aula 2
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ The aim of this course is to familiarise the student with the English literature of the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries. In order to achieve this objective, the students will be asked to read and analyse critically a series of major works. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ 0. Introduction to the course: objectives, requirements, methodology, assessment and bibliography. 1. Introduction to 16th and 17th century England: History, society, and culture. 2. The Elizabethan sonnet: origins and development 3. Shakespeares sonnet sequence (3 March) 4. Sixteenth century prose fiction 5. An introduction to Elizabethan drama (25 March) 6. Elizabethan drama (II): The University Wits 7. Elizabethan drama (III): An Introduction to Shakespeare 8. Elizabethan drama (IV): Shakespearean Tragedy (12 April) 9. Elizabethan drama (V): Shakespearean Comedy and History plays 10. Jacobean drama 11. Poetry in the XVIIth-century 12. Restoration literature: its social and historical background. (17 May) The following readings constitute the core of texts that will form the basis of the literary analysis and discussions in seminars: - Christopher Marlowe, Doctor Faustus - William Shakespeare, Othello and As You Like It - Ben Jonson, Volpone or the Fox - Sir John Vanbrugh, The Provokd Wife We shall also discuss a variety of poems by Sir Thomas Wyatt, Earl of Surrey, Edmund Spenser, Sir Philip Sidney, William Shakespeare, John Donne; a selection of excerpts from Miltons Paradise Lost, Thomas Mores Utopia, Sir Philip Sidneys The Defence of Poesy, John Lilys The Anatomy of Wit, William Shakespeares Henry V and John Drydens MacFlecknoe; films such as Searching for Shakespeare (BBC series), As You Like It and Othello; finally, other articles and extracts by authors such as Mahood, Prince, Taylor and Wells will also be studied in class. All this material will be provided by the teacher. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Seminar work, oral presentation, a written assignment and the final examination will be taken into account to assess the range of different skills that students will be developing. - Students will be encouraged to take part in class discussions and to contribute to the effort of forging and developing a critical vocabulary for the evaluation of a historical view of English literature. - Students will also be requested to make an oral presentation (1 point of the final grade) on a topic previously agreed on with the teacher and before she comments on such topic in class. Students who sit
105
Programas 2010/2011 the June and/or the July exam will make their oral presentation before the end of the second semester lecture period. - Students will also have to submit a long paper (2 points of the final grade) which will be collected by the teacher on a designated day. Deadlines for the essay submission will be: 2 June for those students who choose to sit the June exam and 29 June for those students who sit the July exam. Students must submit one printed copy of their essay to the lecturer. - There will be one final end-of-term examination for all students consisting of questions on the contents of the course and the literary analysis of the works discussed in class. (7 points) * The marks obtained by the students in their long essay and the oral presentation will be added to their final exam mark. ** If students do not make an oral presentation, 1 point will be deducted from their final exam grade. *** Long essay submission is a necessary requirement to sit the final examination. Essays submitted later than the established deadlines will not be taken into consideration by any means. Students are strongly recommended to hand in a draft or drafts of their essays to the teacher during the second semester. **** Final marks will also depend on the correct and fluent use of both written and spoken English the student will show in the course of the semester. A note on plagiarism: document your sources. Using the words of others without acknowledgement and the appropriate citation methods will be punished with a "fail" in the final mark of the subject. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Besides this bibliography, when required, students will be provided by the teacher with a more specific list of readings about each text of the units, topics and/or authors and texts discussed in class. The following books can be found in the University of La Rioja Library. Abrams, M. H. A Glossary of Literary Terms. New York: Holt Rinehart and Wilson, 1981. _________. Ed. The Norton Anthology of English Literature. 1962. 2 vols. 7th ed. New York and London: W. W. Norton, 2000. Alexander, Michael and Felicity Riddy. eds. Macmillan Anthologies of English Literature. The Middle Ages (Vol. I). London: Macmillan, 1989. Allardyce, Nicoll. A History of English Drama: 1600-1900. Vol. 1. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1961. Бlvarez Amorуs, Josй A., ed.-coord. Historia Crнtica de la Novela Inglesa. Salamanca: Almar Anglнstica, 1998. Aughterson, Kate. Ed. The English Renaissance: An Anthology of Sources and Documents. London and New York: Routledge, 1998. Baugh, Albert Croll, et al. A Literary History of England. The Middle Ages. London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1977. Barker, Simon and Hilary Hinds. eds. The Routledge Anthology of Renaissance Drama. London and New York: Routledge, 2003. Bradford, Richard, ed. Introducing Literary Studies. London: Harvester Wheatsheaf, 1996. Bradley, A. C. Shakespearean Tragedy: Lectures on Hamlet, Othello, King Lear, Macbeth. London: Penguin Books, 1991. Braunmuller, A. R. and Michel Hattaway, Eds. The Cambridge Companion to English Renaissance Drama. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1990. Belsey, Catherine. The subject of tragedy: identity and difference in Renaissance drama. London; New York: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1993. Carter, Ronald and John McRae. The Routledge history of literature in English: Britain and Ireland. London and New York: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1997. Clark, Sandra. The Penguin Shakespeare Dictionary. London: Penguin, 1999. Clarke, George William and William, Aldis Wright. eds. The Plays and Sonnets by William Shakespeare. 4Є ed. Chicago: Encyclopaedia Britannica, 1993. Corns, Thomas N. A History of Seventeenth-Century English Literature. Oxford: Blackwell, 2007. Cuddon, J. A. A Dictionary of Literary Terms. Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1982. 106
Programas 2010/2011 Daiches, David. A Critical History of English Literature. London: Secker & Warburg, 1968. Demaria JR, Robert. ed. British Literature 1640-1789: An Anthology. Malden, MA: Blackwell, 1996. Dillon, Janette. The Cambridge Introduction to Shakespeares Tragedies. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 2007. Drabble, Margaret. The Oxford Companion to English Literature. Oxford: Oxford UP, 1985. Dyson, A.E. ed. Shakespeare: The Sonnets. Casebook Series. London: Macmillan, 1985. Elam, Keir. The Semiotics of Theatre and Drama. London and New York: Routledge, 1987. Elices Agudo, Juan F. Historical and Theoretical Approaches to English Satire. Muenchen: Lincom, 2004. Ferber, Michael. A Dictionary of Literary Symbols. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1999. Ford, Boris, ed. The Pelican Guide to English Literature. Vols. 2-4. Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1972. ________. Ed. 16th Century Britain: The Cambridge Cultural History. Vol. 3. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1992. ________. Ed. 17th Century Britain: The Cambridge Cultural History. Vol. 4. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1992. Fox, Alistair. The English Renaissance: Identity and Representation in Elizabethan England. Oxford: Blackwell, 1997. Freudenburg, Kirk. Ed. The Cambridge Companion to Roman Satire. Cambridge and New York: Cambridge UP, 2005. Frye, Northrop, et al. The Harper Handbook to Literature. With a chronology of literature and world events. New York: Harper and Row, 1985. Galvбn Reula, J.F. ed. Estudios Literarios Ingleses: Edad Media. Madrid: Cбtedra: 1985. Grazia, Magreta de and Stanley Wells. Eds. The Cambridge Companion to Shakespeare. Cambridge. Cambridge UP, 2001. Hamilton, Donna B. ed. A Concise Companion to English Renaissance Literature. Malden, MA: Blackwell, 2006. Hawthorn, Jeremy. A Glossary of Contemporary Literary Theory. 4th edition. London: Arnold. New York: Oxford UP, 2000. Hidalgo, Pilar et al. Historia Crнtica del Teatro Inglйs. Alcoy: Marfil, 1988. ______. Shakespeare Posmoderno. Sevilla: U de Sevilla, Secretariado de Publicaciones, 1997. ______. Shakespeare en el Umbral del Siglo XXI. Mбlaga: U de Mбlaga, D.L. 1998. Kastan, David Scott. A Companion to Shakespeare. Malden, MA: Blackwell, 1999. Lerner, Lawrence. ed. Shakespeares tragedies: An Anthology of Modern Criticism. London: Penguin, 1970. Lewis, C.S. English Literature in the 16th century. Oxford: Oxford UP, 1973. _________ The Discarded Image: an introduction to medieval and renaissance literature. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1994. Mahood, M.M. Shakespeares Wordplay: The Sonnets Ed. P. Jones. Shakespeare: The Sonnets. London: Macmillan, 1985. Maley, Willy. Nation, State, and Empire in English Renaissance Literature: Shakespeare to Milton. Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan, 2003. McGowan, Ian. The Restoration and Eighteenth Century. Macmillan Anthologies of English Literature, Vol. 3. London: MacMillan, 1989. Murfin, Ross C. and Supryia M. Ray. The Bedford Glossary of Critical and Literary Terms. 2nd. ed. Boston: Palgrave Macmillan, 2003. Murray, Patrick. Literary Criticism: A Glossary of Major Terms. Essex: Longman, 1978. Myers, Robin. compiled and edited. A Dictionary of Literature in the English Language: From Chaucer to 1940. 2 vols. Oxford: Pergamon, 1970. Nilsen, Don L. F. Humour in British literature, from the Middle Ages to the Restoration: A Reference Guide. Westport (Connecticut) and London: Greenwood Press, 1997. Norman Jeffares, A. and Michael Alexander. eds. Macmillan Anthologies of English Literature. 2 vols. Houndmills: Macmillan, 1989. Norton, Glyn P. ed. The Cambridge History of Literary Criticism. Vol. III. The Renaissance, 1999. Onega, Susana. ed. Estudios Literarios Ingleses: Renacimiento y Barroco. Madrid: Cбtedra, 1986. Owen, Susan J. ed. A Companion to Restoration Drama. Oxford: Blackwell, 2001. Paine, Michael. ed. A Dictionary of Cultural and Critical Theory. Oxford: Blackwell, 2000. Paterson, Don. ed. 101 Sonnets: From Shakespeare to Heaney. London: Faber and Faber, 1999. 107
Programas 2010/2011 Payne Fisk, Deborah. The Cambridge Companion to English Restoration Theatre. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 2000. Pйrez Gбllego, Cбndido, dir. Historia de la literatura inglesa II. Madrid: Taurus, 1998. Prince, T.T. The Sonnets from Wyatt to Shakespeare Ed. P. Jones. Shakespeare: The Sonnets. London: Macmillan, 1985. Quintero, Ruben. ed. A Companion to Satire. Oxford: Blackwell, 2007. Roston, Murray. Sixteenth-Century English Literature. London: Macmillan, 1982. Rudrum, Alan, Joseph Black and Holly Faith Nelson. eds. The Broadview Anthology of Seventeenth Century Prose. Peterborough, Ontario: Broadview Press, 2001. Sampson, George. The Concise Cambridge History of English Literature. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1970. Sanders, Norman et al. The short Oxford history of English literature. Oxford: Oxford UP, 2000. Selden, Raman. Practising Theory and Reading Literature: An Introduction. New York: Harvester Wheatsheaf, 1989. Scott, A. F. Current Literary Terms: A Concise Dictionary of their Origin and Use. London: Macmillan, 1979. Schoenfeldt, Michael. ed. A Companion to Shakespeares Sonnets. Oxford: Blackwell, 2007. Sherburne, George and Donald F. Bond. The Restoration and the Eighteenth Century. A Literary History of England. Ed. Albert C. Baugh. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1967. Stapleton, M. The Cambridge Guide to English Literature. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1983. Wallace, Jennifer. The Cambridge Introduction to Tragedy. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 2007. Wells, Stanley and Sarah Stanton. eds. The Cambridge Companion to Shakespeare on Stage. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 2002. _________. and Gary Taylor. eds. The Oxford Shakespeare: The Complete Works Compact Edition. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1998. White, Martнn. Renaissance Drama in Action: An Introduction to Aspects of Theatre practice and Performance. London and New York: Routledge, 1998. Womack, Peter. English Renaissance Drama. Malden, MA: Blackwell, 2006. Yelland, H. L., S. C. Jones, and K. S. W. Easton. A Handbook of Literary Terms. London: Angus and Robertson Publishers, 1983. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Melania Terrazas Gallego 108
Programas 2010/2011
2051023
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2051023 HISTORIA DE LA LENGUA INGLESA II
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 3
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 4,5
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 4,5
Prбcticos Aula 0
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ Йsta es la segunda parte de un curso de iniciaciуn a la historia de la lengua inglesa, cuyo objetivo general es que los alumnos tengan una visiуn panorбmica del inglйs en su vertiente diacrуnica. Mбs concretamente, se pretende que los alumnos: - Se familiaricen con los conceptos de lengua como cambio y lengua como uso. - Sean capaces de describir los grandes periodos de la historia del inglйs desde el punto de vista fonolуgico, morfosintбctico y lйxico-semбntico. - Comprendan la interrelaciуn entre factores histуricos y culturales y el desarrollo de la lengua inglesa. - Identifiquen los rasgos histуricos que perviven en el inglйs contemporбneo __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ UNIT 1: THE MIDDLE ENGLISH PERIOD: LANDMARKS, HISTORICAL, CULTURAL AND LINGUISTIC BACKGROUND. PROBLEMS IN THE DESCRIPTION OF THE LANGUAGE. Lesson 1: Middle English phonetics and phonology Lesson 2: Middle English morphology and syntax Lesson 3: Middle English lexicon and semantics UNIT 2: THE EARLY-MODERN ENGLISH PERIOD: LANDMARKS, HISTORICAL, CULTURAL AND LINGUISTIC BACKGROUND. PROBLEMS IN THE DESCRIPTION OF THE LANGUAGE. Lesson 4: Early-Modern English phonetics and phonology Lesson 5: Early-Modern English morphology and syntax Lesson 6: Early-Modern English lexicon and semantics __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__D__E__P_R__Б_C__I_C_A__S__E_N___L_A__B_O__R_A__T_O__R__I_O__Y__C_A__M__P_O_____________________________________ Tanto en las sesiones teуricas como en las clases prбcticas, el trabajo en esta asignatura se centra en la discusiуn y el comentario de textos y niveles lingьнsticos. Se anima a los alumnos a tomar parte en las sesiones teуrico-prбcticas. La lengua de las clases, los trabajos de curso y los exбmenes serб el inglйs. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Cada alumno podrб optar por evaluarse de manera continua (A) o por medio de un examen final (B). A. La evaluaciуn continua se basarб en la asistencia a clase (obligatoria en un 85% si se opta por esta modalidad) y en la realizaciуn de un trabajo individual y otro en grupo a determinar durante las primeras semanas de clase. Antes del ъltimo dнa de clase del cuatrimestre se publicarбn las calificaciones de la evaluaciуn continua. Los alumnos que hayan superado esta fase no deberбn presentarse a examen final. La calificaciуn mбxima que se puede obtener por medio de la evaluaciуn continua es de Sobresaliente. Para obtener la calificaciуn de Matrнcula de Honor serб necesario haber obtenido la calificaciуn de Sobresaliente en la evaluaciуn continua y mejorar la calificaciуn en el examen final. B. Los criterios de evaluaciуn del examen final serбn los siguientes: (i) conocimiento y comprensiуn de los tуpicos teуricos de la asignatura; (ii) rigor terminolуgico y precisiуn del lenguaje empleado; (iii) capacidad de comentar y contextualizar los rasgos identificados en los distintos niveles; y (iv) fluidez y correcciуn de la lengua inglesa.
109
Programas 2010/2011 __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Baker, Peter. 2003. Introduction to Old English. Oxford: Blackwell. Also Available electronically at: http://www.wmich.edu/medieval/resources/IOE/index.html Bammesberger, Alfred. 1992. "The place of English in Germanic in Indo-European," In Hogg (Ed.), 1992. Bosworth, Joseph, and Northcote Toller. 1898. An Anglo-Saxon Dictionary. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Campbell, Lyle. 2000. Historical linguistics: an introduction. Cambridge (Massachusetts): The MIT Press. Clark Hall, John R. 1916 (1894). A Concise Anglo-Saxon Dictionary. Cambridge: C.U.P. Conde Silvestre, Juan Camilo, Sбnchez Pйrez, Aquilino and Juan Manuel Hernбndez Campoy. 1996. An introduction to the history of the English language. Murcia: ICE Universidad de Murcia. Freeborn, D. 1992. From Old English to Standard English. London: MacMillan. Hogg, Richard. 1992. The Cambridge History of the English Language. (4 Volumes). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Joseph, J. 2002. From Whitney to Chomsky. Essays in the history of American Linguistics. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Lass, Roger. 1994. Old English. A Historical Companion. Cambridge: C.U.P. Pyles, Thomas and John Algeo. 1982 (1973). The origins and development of the English language. Orlando: Harcourt Brace. Schendl, Herbert. 2001. Historical linguistics. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Smith, J. 1996. An Historical Study of English. Function, Form and Change. London: Routledge. Smith, J. 1999. Essentials of Early English. London: Routledge. Referencias online: Bosworth and Toller's dictionary: http://beowulf.engl.uky.edu/~kiernan/BT/Bosworth-Toller.htm Clark Hall's dictionary: http://www.ling.upenn.edu/~kurisuto/germanic/oe_clarkhall_about.html#images Etymological dictionary: http://www.etymonline.com/ For a brief outline of the main historical events involving linguistic change: http://www.englishclub.com/english-language-history.htm Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Roberto Torre Alonso 110
Programas 2010/2011
2051025
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2051025 LITERATURA INGLESA VII
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 4
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 4
Prбcticos Aula 2
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__A__IM__S____________________________________________________________________________________________ The aim of this course is to familiarize students with the most outstanding authors and works of medieval English literature. Students will be provided with the socio-historical framework and will be taught how to read and analyse critically a series of major works. __S__Y_L_L__A_B__U__S_____________________________________________________________________________________ 0. General Characteristics of the Medieval Period 1. Old English Literature 1.1. Christian poetry: 2.1.1. Caedmon and his school: scriptural poetry. 2.1.2. Cynewulf and his school: liturgical poetry. 2.1.3. "The Dream of the Rood". 1.2. National poetry: 2.2.1. Elegiac poetry: The Wanderer, The Wifes Lament, Wulf and Eadwacer. 2.2.2. Epic poetry: Beowulf. 2.2.3. Riddles 1.3. Old English prose. 2. Middle English Literature. 2.1. Religious record: 2.1.1.- Ancrene Riwle. 2.1.2.- The debate: The Owl and the Nightingale. 2.2. Religious and secular writing: 2.2.1.- From heroic poetry to verse romance: the Arthurian cycle. 2.2.2.- The fabliau 2.2.3.- Minor genres. 2.3. Great individual writers: 2.3.1.- The dream allegory: William LanglandsPiers the Ploughman. 2.3.2.- The alliterative revival: Sir Gawain and the Green Knight. 2.3.3.- Geoffrey Chaucers The Canterbury Tales. 2.4. The transition period: 2.4.1.- The ballads. 2.4.2.- Thomas Malorys Le Morte dArthur. __A__S_S__E_S__S_M__E_N__T__________________________________________________________________________________ Apart from the final examination, students will have to write a critical essay, typed in English, which will be part of the final mark (30%). The students will have to advance some of their essays' conclusions in an oral presentation in class. The topic chosen for the essay must be discussed with the tutor beforehand. Active participation in class will be taken into account in order to round up final marks.
111
Programas 2010/2011 Assessment A: Exam (70 %) + essay with presentation (30%) Optionally, the students can work on two critical essays proposed by the teacher which will amount up to 20 % of the final mark. Assessment B: Exam (50%) + essay with presentation (30%) + two short critical essays (20%) IMPORTANT NOTE ON PLAGIARISM: Plagiarize: vt. to use and pass off (someone elses ideas, inventions, writings, etc.) as ones own // v.i. to take anothers writings, etc. and pass them off as ones own (Websters Encyclopaedic Dictionary). Document your sources. Using the words of others without appropriate acknowledgement and the appropriate citation methods will be punished with a fail grade (0.0). __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__P_H__Y________________________________________________________________________________ 1. Primary Sources: Beowulf. A New Translation. Heaney, S. trans. New edition. 2000. Faber and Faber. Beowulf. Verse Translation. Michael, A. trans. Revised Edition. 2003.Penguin Classics. Chaucer, G. The Canterbury Tales. Penguin Edition Medieval English Verse. Stone, B. Intr & Trans. 1970. Penguin. Malory, Thomas. La Morte D'Arthur. Norton Edition Monmouth, Geoffrey of. The History of the Kings of England. Thorpe, L. trans. 1973. Penguin. Sir Gawain and the Green Knight. Penguin Edition The Earliest English Poems. Michael, A. trans. 2006. Penguin Classics. The Mabinogion. Gantz, J. trans. Penguin Classics. All the works studied in this course can be found in: The Norton Anthology of English Literature, volume I. 2. Secondary Sources (general scholarship) Aertsen, H. & Bremmer, R. 1994. Companion to Old English Poetry. Amsterdam: VU University Press Alexander, Michael. 1983. Old English Literature. London: The Macmillan Press Ltd. Baugh, A.C. (ed) 1999. Literary History of England. The Middle Ages. London: Routledge Beadle, Richard. 1994. The Cambridge Companion to Medieval English Theatre. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Benson, Larry D. 1995. Contradictions: From Beowulf to Chaucer. Aldershot: Scholar Press. Boitani, Piero. 1986. English Medieval Narrative in the 13th and 14th Centuries. 1982. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Bolton, W.F. 1993. The Penguin History of Literature. The Middle Ages. London: Penguin. Brown, P. (ed) 2006. A Companion to Medieval English Literature and Culture 1350­1500. Blackwell. Burrow, J.A. 1982. Medieval Writers and Their Work: Middle English Literature 1100­1500. Oxford: OUP. Calin, William. 1994. The French Tradition and the Literature of Medieval England. Toronto: University of Toronto Press. Craun, Edwin D. 2005 (1997) Lies, Slander and Obscenity in Medieval English Literature. Cambridge: CUP. Deny, Neville, ed. 1973. Medieval Drama. London: Edward Arnold. Donoghue, Daniel. 2004. Old English Literature. A Short Introduction. London: Blackwell Fulk, R.D. & Cain, C. M. 2003. A History of Old English Literature. London: Blackwell Galvбn Reula, J. F. 1985. Estudios Literarios Ingleses: Edad Media. Madrid: Cбtedra. Galloway, Andrew. 2006. Medieval Literature and Culture. N.Y.: Continuum International. Godden, M & Lapidge, M. 1998. The Cambridge Companion to Old English Literature. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press Greenfield, S.B. & Calder, D.G. 1986. A New Critical History of Old English Literature. N.Y: New York University Press. Hanna, Ralph. 2005. London Literature, 1300­1380. Cambridge: CUP. Heffernan, T. J. 1992. Sacred Biography: Saints and their Biographers in the Middle Ages. Oxford: OUP. 112
Programas 2010/2011 Johnson, D.F. and Treharne, E. (ed) 2005. Readings in Medieval Texts. Interpreting Old and Middle English Literature. Oxford: OUP. Kruger, Steven F. 2005. Dreaming in the Middle Ages. Cambridge: CUP. Lambdin, L. & Lambdin, R.T. 2002. A Companion to Old and Middle English Literature. London: Greenwood Press Meale, Carol M. ed, 1996. Women and Literature in Britain, 1150-1500. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Murdoch, Brian. 1996. The Germanic Hero. Politics and Pragmatism in Early Medieval Poetry. London: The Hambledon. Pearsall, Derek. 2003. Arthurian Romance. A Short Introduction. London: Blackwell. Pulsiano, P. & Treharne, E. 2001. A Companion to Anglo-Saxon Literature. London: Blackwell. Solopova, E. & Lee, S. D. Key Concepts in Medieval Literature. Palgrave Macmillan. Speirs, John. 1971. Medieval English Poetry. London: Faber and Faber. Trapp, J.B., ed. 1973. The Oxford Anthology of English Literature. Medieval English Literature. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Turville-Petre, Thorlac. 2006. Reading Middle English Literature. London: Blackwell Wallace, D. 2002. The Cambridge History of Medieval English Literature. Cambridge: CUP. White, Hugh. 2000. Nature, Sex and Goodness in Medieval Literary Tradition. Oxford: OUP. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Cristina Flores Moreno 113
Programas 2010/2011
2052001
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2052001 LENGUA FRANCESA II
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 1
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ -Adquirir las competencias definidas como nivel A2 de comunicaciуn dentro del marco comъn europeo de referencia para el aprendizaje de lengua extranjera. - Adquirir los conocimientos culturales, lйxicos, gramaticales y comunicativos necesarios para poder participar con йxito en бmbitos variados de la vida social. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ -Nociones, actos de habla, contenidos grmaticales y culturales necesarios para alcanzar con йxito un nivel A2 de competencias orales y escritas (unidades 7 a 12 del mйtodo Connexions Niveau I) __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ - Exбmen final que constarб de dos partes : - A) Evaluaciуn de las destrezas orales (comprensiуn y expresiуn oral) - B) Evaluaciуn de destrezas escritas (gramбtica y produccion escrita) __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ -Connexions nє 1: mйthode de franзais et cahier d exercices.con vнdeo y CD incorporado. -Robert, P :Micro-Robert : dictionnaite du franзais primordial. -Garcнa Pelayo y Gross Ramуn : Larousse moderno framcйs-espaсol -Abry, D. y Chalaron, M.L.: La grammaire des premiers temps -Documentos y materiales que completarбn la bibliografнa aportada en funciуn del nivel, y de la evoluciуn del aprendizaje del grupo-clase. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ Luz Oyуn Baсales y MЄ. Бngeles Moreno Lara
114
Programas 2010/2011
2052002
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2052002 FONЙTICA INGLESA I
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 2
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula
Prбcticos Laboratorio 3
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ This subject is designed as an introduction to the analysis of English phonology, always combining theory with practice. The core of this course is the basic segmental aspects of English phonology (phonemes). Only brief hints will be given concerning suprasegmental aspects and allophones of the English language as these two topics will be explored in depth in other subjects. Specifically, through this subject, students are expected to learn to identify, describe, and produce the English phonemic system. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ Unit 1. Basic theoretical concepts Unit 2. English vowel system Unit 3. English consonant system Unit 4. Introduction to English allophones Unit 5. Accentuation __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__D__E__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__E__N__L_A__B_O__R__A_T__O__R_I_O__Y__C__A_M__P__O___________________________________ 1. Identification and oral production of English phonemes. 2. Phonemic transcription (broad notation) of oral and written texts. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Final marks will depend on the results of a written exam (50% of the final mark) and an oral exam (50% of the final mark). The written exam will consist of two parts: 1.A theoretical part in which students will be assessed on some of the parts of the syllabus units, and 2.A phonemic transcription of a text. In the oral exam, students will be asked to read adequately a normal written English text and a phonemic transcription of a different English text. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ ALCARAZ VARO, E. 1988. Fonйtica Inglesa para Espaсoles. Alicante: Bryn Moody. BOZMAN, T. 1993. Sound Barriers. A Practice Book for Spanish Students of English Phonetics. Zaragoza: Secretariado de Publicaciones de la Universidad de Zaragoza. BYRNE, D. and G. Walsh. 1979. Pronunciation Practice. 1973. London: Longman. CLARK, J. 1992. An Introduction to Phonetics and Phonology. Oxford: Blackwell. CONNOR, J. D. 1980. Better English Pronunciation. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. 2nd edition. DALE, P. & L. Poms. 1994. English Pronunciation for International Students. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice Hall. FINCH, D. & H. Ortiz Lira. 1982. A Course in English Phonetics for Spanish Speakers. London: Heinemman Educational Books. GIMSON, A.C. 1989. An Introduction to the Pronunciation of English. London: Arnold. 4th edition. GIMSON, A.C. 1994. Gimsons Pronunciation of English. London: Arnold. 5th edition, revised by Alan Cruttenden.
115
Programas 2010/2011 HOOKE, R. & J. Rowell. 1982. A Handbook of English Pronunciation. London: Arnold. JONES, Daniel. 1986. English Pronouncing Dictionary (Revised by A.C. Gimson). London: Dent and Sons. 14th edition. LEWIS, W. 1972. A Concise Pronouncing Dictionary of British and American English. London: Oxford University Press. MOTT, B. 1996. A Course in Phonetics and Phonology for Spanish Learners. Barcelona: Ediciones Universitarias de Barcelona. ROACH, P. 1983. English Phonetics and Phonology: a Practical Course. London: Cambridge University Press. WELLS, J.C. 1990. Longman Pronunciation Dictionary. London: Longman Note: The complete handouts of each syllabus unit including specific references will be uploaded to the Campus virtual at the beginning of the semester: http://www.campusvirtual.unirioja.es. Note: A selection of resources will be uploaded to the Campus virtual during the course: http://www.campusvirtual.unirioja.es. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Almudena Fernбndez Fontecha. 116
Programas 2010/2011
2052003
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2052003 GЙNEROS Y RECURSOS LITERARIOS EN INGLЙS
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 2
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ This course is intended to offer a general view of both literary theory and practical criticism. Therefore, the discussion of theories and ideas is balanced with the teaching of such disciplines as rhetoric, prosody, and narratology. PROGRAMA TEУRICO ______________________________________________________________________________________________ The syllabus contains six basic chapters: 1- Poetics and rhetoric. 2- English Prosody. The study of English verse. 3. The concepts of literature, literary theory and literary criticism. 4- Literary Genres. 5- Critical schools and movements. An historical approach to literary criticism. 6- narrative structures and their study. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Evaluation is based on a ten-page critical essay typed in English on a topic previously discussed on with the teacher. Deadlines for the paper submission will coincide with the exam date. Students are strongly recommended to hand in a draft of their essays to the teachers during the semester. Tutorial sessions will be centred on the process of elaborating the aforementioned paper. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Abrams, M. H., 1988, A Glossary of Literary Terms, Holt, Rinehart and Winston, Fort Worth. Bal, M., 1985, Narratology. Introduction to the Theory of Narrative, University of Toronto Press, Toronto. Blamires, H., 1991, A History of Literary Criticism, Macmillan, London. Cuddon, J., 1982, A Dictionary of Literary Terms, Penguin, Harmondsworth. Dнez Borque, J. M., 1985, Mйtodos de estudio de la obra literaria, Taurus, Madrid. Ducrot, O. y Todorov, T., 1972: 1974, Diccionario enciclopйdico de las ciencias del lenguaje, Siglo Veintiuno, Argentina, Buenos Aires. Eagleton, T., 1983, Literary Theory. An Introduction, Basil Blackwell, Oxford. Fraser, G. S., 1970: 1983, Metre, Rhyme and Free Verse, Methuen, London. Frye, N. 1957, Anatomy of Criticism: Four Essays, Princeton University Press, Princeton (N. J.) ______ et al., 1985, The Harper Handbook to Literature, Harper and Row, New York. Genette, G., 1980, Narrative Discourse (trans. of an important essay contained in Figures III), Cornell University Press, Ithaca. Hдublein, E., 1978, The Stanza, Methuen, London. Hernadi, P., 1978, Teorнa de los gйneros literarios, Antoni Bosch, Barcelona. Lausberg, H., 1960: 1973, Manual de retуrica literaria, tres vols., Madrid, Gredos. ________ , 1983, Elementos de retуrica literaria, Madrid, Gredos. Leech, G., 1969: 1988, A Linguistic Guide to English Poetry, Longman, London- New York. Mortara Garavelli, B., 1988: 1991, Manual de retуrica, Madrid, Cбtedra.
117
Programas 2010/2011 Preminger, A., y Brogan, T. V. F. Eds., 1993, The New Princeton Encyclopedia of Poetry and Poetics, Princeton University Press, Princeton (N. J.). Ray, W., 1984, Literary Meaning. From Phenomenology to Deconstruction, Basil Blackwell, Oxford. Rimmon-Kenan, Sh., 1983, narrative fiction: Contemporary Poetics, Methuen, London. Selden, R., 1985, A Readers Guide to Contemporary Literary Criticism, The Harvester Press, Brighton. Wellek, R. and Warren, A., 1949: 1985, Theory of Literature, Penguin, Harmondsworth. Wellek, R., 1986, A History of Modern Criticism 8 vols, Yale University Press, New Haven & London Abrams, M. H., 1988, A Glossary of Literary Terms, Holt, Rinehart and Winston, Fort Worth. Bal, M., 1985, Narratology. Introduction to the Theory of Narrative, University of Toronto Press, Toronto. Blamires, H., 1991, A History of Literary Criticism, Macmillan, London. Cuddon, J., 1982, A Dictionary of Literary Terms, Penguin, Harmondsworth. Dнez Borque, J. M., 1985, Mйtodos de estudio de la obra literaria, Taurus, Madrid. Ducrot, O. y Todorov, T., 1972: 1974, Diccionario enciclopйdico de las ciencias del lenguaje, Siglo Veintiuno, Argentina, Buenos Aires. Eagleton, T., 1983, Literary Theory. An Introduction, Basil Blackwell, Oxford. Fraser, G. S., 1970: 1983, Metre, Rhyme and Free Verse, Methuen, London. Frye, N. 1957, Anatomy of Criticism: Four Essays, Princeton University Press, Princeton (N. J.) ______ et al., 1985, The Harper Handbook to Literature, Harper and Row, New York. Genette, G., 1980, Narrative Discourse (trans. of an important essay contained in Figures III), Cornell University Press, Ithaca. Hдublein, E., 1978, The Stanza, Methuen, London. Hernadi, P., 1978, Teorнa de los gйneros literarios, Antoni Bosch, Barcelona. Lausberg, H., 1960: 1973, Manual de retуrica literaria, tres vols., Madrid, Gredos. ________ , 1983, Elementos de retуrica literaria, Madrid, Gredos. Leech, G., 1969: 1988, A Linguistic Guide to English Poetry, Longman, London- New York. Mortara Garavelli, B., 1988: 1991, Manual de retуrica, Madrid, Cбtedra. Preminger, A., y Brogan, T. V. F. Eds., 1993, The New Princeton Encyclopedia of Poetry and Poetics, Princeton University Press, Princeton (N. J.). Ray, W., 1984, Literary Meaning. From Phenomenology to Deconstruction, Basil Blackwell, Oxford. Rimmon-Kenan, Sh., 1983, Narrative Fiction: Contemporary Poetics, Methuen, London. Selden, R., 1985, A Readers Guide to Contemporary Literary Criticism, The Harvester Press, Brighton. Wellek, R. and Warren, A., 1949: 1985, Theory of Literature, Penguin, Harmondsworth. Wellek, R., 1986, A History of Modern Criticism 8 vols, Yale University Press, New Haven & London Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Pedro Santana Martнnez y Melania Terrazas Gallego 118
Programas 2010/2011
2052004
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2052004 FONЙTICA INGLESA II
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 2
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula
Prбcticos Laboratorio 3
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ Students are expected to learn to: - Identify, describe and produce the phonemic and allophonic variations that can be found in connected speech. - Identify, describe and produce the different suprasegmental elements in English. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ I. SEGMENTAL ANALYSIS 1. Connected speech 1.1. Weak forms 1.2. Linking 1.3. Assimilation 1.4. Elision 2. Allophonic variation 2.1. Consonant syllabicity 2.2. Plosives 2.2.1. Aspiration 2.2.2. Types of release 2.2.3. The glottal stop 2.3. Clear and dark `l' 2.4. Realizations of `r' II. SUPRASEGMENTAL ANALYSIS 3. The syllable 3.1. The structure of the syllable 3.2. Patterns of acceptability: phonotactic constraints 3.3. The sonority sequence generalization 3.4. Onset maximalism or the principle of maxim onset 3.5 Ambisyllabicity 3.6. Syllable weight 4. Stress and accent 4.1. Stress vs. accent 4.2. Strong and weak syllables 4.3. Levels of stress 4.4. Stress patterns 4.5. Rules for the placement of stress 4.6. The distinctive function of stress 5. Rhythm 5.1. Syllable-timed rhythm and stress-timed rhythm 5.2. Rhythm and consecutive stressed words 5.3. Rhythm and stress shift 5.4. The effects of English rhythm on syllable duration 5.5. The effects of English rhythm on vowel quality 5.6. Division of rhythmic phrases: the foot
119
Programas 2010/2011 6. Intonation 6.1. Definition of intonation 6.2. Tonality 6.3. Tonicity 6.4. The meaning of the different intonation patterns 6.5. Intonation of different grammatical patterns 6.6. The functions of intonation in English __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Final marks will depend on the results of a written exam which will include narrow transcription, syllable division, accentuation, recognition of intonation patterns, and other aspects covered by the syllabus. There will be two main parts: theory and practice. The practical part can include aural practice. It is a basic requirement to pass the subject that students express themselves in correct and fluent English, paying especial attention to the specific terminology of the subject. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Alcaraz, E. 1999. Fonйtica inglesa para espaсoles: teorнa y prбctica. Marfil. Bradford, B. 1988. Intonation in Context. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Bozman, T. 1993. Sound Barriers. A Practice Book for Spanish Students of English Phonetics. Zaragoza: Secretariado de Publicaciones de la Universidad de Zaragoza. Brazil, D. 1985. The Communicative Value of Intonation in English. ELR, University of Birmingham. Brazil, D. 1994. Pronunciation for Advanced Learners of English. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Clark, J.E. 1990. An Introduction to Phonetics and Phonology. Blackwell. Crutenden, A. 1991. Intonation. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Estebas, E. 2009. Teach Yourself English Pronunciation: An Interactive Course for Spanish Speakers. Netbiblo-UNED. Finch, D. & H. Ortiz Lira. 1982. A Course in English Phonetics for Spanish Speakers. London: Heinemman Educational Books. Garcнa Lecumberri, M.L. 2000. English Transcription Course. Arnold. Knowles, G. 1987. Patterns of Spoken English. London: Longman. Mortimer, C. 1976. Stress Time. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mott, B. 1996. A Course in Phonetics and Phonology for Spanish Learners. Barcelona: Ediciones Universitarias de Barcelona. Navarro Tomбs, Tomбs. 1980. Manual de pronunciaciуn espaсola. Madrid: Consejo Superior de Investigaciones Cientнficas. OConnor & G. F. Arnold. 1982. Intonation of Colloquial English. London: Longman. Connor, F. D. 1982. Phonetic Drill Reader. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Roach, P. 1983. English Phonetics and Phonology: A Practical Course. London: Cambridge University Press. Wells, J.C. 1990. Longman Pronunciation Dictionary. London: Longman. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ Sandra Peсa Cervel 120
Programas 2010/2011
2052005
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2052005 LINGЬНSTICA ANGLOAMERICANA
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 2
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 4,5
Prбcticos Aula 1,5
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ Tras cursar esta asignatura el alumno serб capaz de utilizar los conceptos bбsicos de la descripciуn lingьнstica en las subdisciplinas de la fonйtica y fonologнa, morfologнa y sintaxis, y semбntica; y de contextualizar dichos conceptos con referencia a las principales corrientes y escuelas de la lingьнstica teуrica europea y americana del siglo veinte. La lengua de los exбmenes serб el inglйs. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ Unit 1: Phonetics and phonology Unit 2: Morphology and syntax Unit 3: Semantics Unit 4: Historical linguistics Unit 5: Computational linguistics Unit 6: Linguistic typology Unit 7: The 20th century in European linguistics Unit 8: The 20th century in North-American linguistics __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Los alumnos serбn evaluados por medio de un examen final Los criterios de evaluaciуn del examen final serбn los siguientes: (i) conocimiento y comprensiуn de los tуpicos teуricos de la asignatura; (ii) rigor terminolуgico y precisiуn del lenguaje empleado; (iii) capacidad de comentar y contextualizar la terminologнa de escuelas y corrientes; y (iv) fluidez y correcciуn de la lengua inglesa. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Clark, V. et al. 1998. Language. Readings in Language and Culture. New York: St. Martinґs Press. Finch, G. 2003. How to Study Linguistics. A Guide to Understanding Language. New York: Palgrave. Fromkin, V. ed. 2000. Linguistics: An Introduction to Linguistic Theory. Oxford: Blackwell. Hudson, G. 2000. Essential Introductory Linguistics. Oxford: Blackwell. Joseph, J. 2002. From Whitney to Chomsky. Essays in the history of American Linguistics. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Roberto Torre Alonso
121
Programas 2010/2011
2052006
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2052006 LENGUA INGLESA V
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 3
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ This course is designed for students who are beginning the Third Course of English Philology studies and who have therefore completed successfully the Advanced level in English and continue to prepare for a level equivalent to the Cambridge English Proficiency examination. Emphasis is placed on the following aspects: near native fluency, incorporation of advanced structures and vocabulary, etc. In written work, unity, organization and development, and Gold Proficiency structures will be required from students, in speaking and writing. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ The theoretical and practical approach will be based on units 1-7 of Focus on Proficiency and Part One of Story Time. The students will be required to read the following text: Taste and Other Tales by Roal Dahl, followed by an evaluation. These course books will be supplemented by material provided by the teacher such as magazine articles, literary excerpts, etc. This course includes work in the following areas: 1. Fluency: Developing an idea using compound and complex sentences that present evidence and support for theme development. 2. Grammatical accuracy: expanded use of grammatical structures. 3. Pronunciation: increased emphasis on intonation and rhythm. 4. Maintenance of effective communicative dialogue. 5. Using vocabulary specific for communicative purposes including particular topics. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Students are expected to participate in class discussions and debates and to give a formal oral presentation at least once during the semester. Skills examined throughout the course will include: usage and pronunciation; form, cohesion, and unity in written work; and effective and fluent oral delivery. The final mark will consist of the average assessment of the following components: class participation; oral presentations; the written tasks and the final exam. This final exam will include the following components: Dictation, Reading Comprehension, listening, Composition, Oral Interview, and Review of Compulsory readings. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Coursebooks: Jacky Newbrook et al.. 2001. New Proficiency Gold. London: Longman. Hernбez Lerena, Sullivan & Ojeda. 1998. Story Time. Logroсo: Universidad de La Rioja Servicio de Publicaciones. Dahl Roal, Taste and Other Tales. Penguin. Reference Books: Eastwood, J. 1992. Oxford Practice Grammar, Oxford: Oxford University Press. Greenbaum, S. & R. Quirk, R. 1992. A Students Grammar of the English Language. London: Longman. Greenbaum, S. & R. Quirk. 1985. A Comprehensive Grammar of the English Language. Cambridge:
122
Programas 2010/2011 Cambridge University Press. Hewings, M. 1999. Advanced Grammar in Use. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Leech, G. & J. Svartvik. 1995. A Communicative Grammar of English. London: Longman Murphy, R. 1994. English Grammar in Use. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Swan, M.1995. Practical English Usage. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Thomson, A. J. & Martinet, A.V. 1989. A Practical English Grammar. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Vince, M. 1996. First Certificate Language Practice. Oxford: MacMillan. Websters Third New International Dictionary. Chicago: Merriam Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Profesor pendiente de contratar. 123
Programas 2010/2011
2052007
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2052007 COMENTARIO DE TEXTOS INGLESES I
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 3
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ This course is meant to teach students how to read critically and to interpret narrative texts and poems written in English. For that purpose students will be provided with the necessary theoretical tools and practical strategies. Great emphasis will be laid on textual analysis. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ NARRATIVE 1. Defining narrative. Text (/discourse), story and narration. The borders of narrative. ("Tea") 2. Story and events. ("A Good Man Is Hard to Find") 3. Characters and characterisation. ("The Magic Barrel") 4. Narrative communication: Historical author and historical reader. Implied author and implied reader. Narrator and narratee. ("The Blue Cross") 5. Narrative technique: Narrator typology. Narrative levels and distance. Focalisation. Voice and speech. ("The Short Happy Life of Francis Macomber") 6. Narrative Time. ("The Dark Glasses") 7. Structure: closure, suspense, surprise, etc. Gaps and cruxes. ("The Bath") 8. Interpretation: Intentional, symptomatic and adaptive readings. 9. Interpretation: ideological readings. 10. Narrative strategies in film: comparing words and images. (James Joyce's "The Dead"/John Huston's The Dead) 11. Feedback: Analysis of Brideshead Revisited. POETRY 12. Introduction. What is poetry? Reading poetry. 13. Rhythm and rhyme. Blank and free verse. 14. Form and meaning in poetry. Poetic form: the sonnet. Other set forms. Thematic form: pastoral, ode, ballad, epic, elegy. 15. Poetry and art. 16. The evolution of English poetry from Renaissance to Post-Modernism. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ · There will be a final examination in June in which students will have to answer questions about the theory discussed in class and write a critical analysis of narrative and poetical texts. · Students' active participation in class will be taken into account in order to round up final marks. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ STORIES: - Saki Munro "Tea" - G.K. Chesterton "The Blue Cross" - Flannery O'Connor "A Good Man Is Hard to Find" - Bernard Malamud "The Magic Barrel" - Muriel Spark: "The Dark Glasses" - Ernest Hemingway "The Short Happy Life of Francis Macomber" - Raymond Carver "The Bath"
124
Programas 2010/2011 - James Joyce "The Dead" FILM: John Huston The Dead NOVEL: Evelyn Waugh Brideshead Revisited POEMS given in class. RECOMMENDED READING: Abbott, H. Porter. 2002. The Cambridge Introduction to Narrative. Cambridge: C.U.P. Bajtin, Mijail. 1991. Teorнa y estйtica de la novela. Madrid: Taurus. Bal, Mieke. 1985. Narratology: Introduction to the Theory of Narrative. Toronto: University of Toronto Press. Barber, Charles. 1983. Poetry in English: An Introduction. London: Macmillan. Booth, W.C. 1961. The Rhetoric of Fiction. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press. Brooks, Cleanth and Robert Penn Warren. 1988. Understanding Poetry. New York: Harcourt Brace. Bush, Douglas. 1965. English Poetry: the main currents from Chaucer to the present. 1952. London: Methuen. Chatman, Seymour. 1990. Historia y discurso. Madrid: Taurus. Cohan, Steve & Linda M. Shires. 1988. Telling Stories. A Theoretical Analysis of Narrative Fiction. New York and London: Routledge. Crystal , David & Davy, D. 1969. Investigating English Style. London: Longman. Curtis, Tony. 1990. How to Study Modern Poetry. London: Macmillan. Cutler-Stuart, Margaret. 1988. How to Understand Poetry. Sydney: Hale & Iremonger. Eagleton, Terry. 1996. Literary Theory: An Introduction. London: Blackwell. Easthope, Anthony. 1990. Poetry as Discourse. New York: Routledge. Forster, E. M. 1963. Aspects of the Novel. 1927. Harmondsworth: Penguin. Furniss, Tom and Michael Bath. 1996. Reading Poetry: an introduction. London: Prentice Hall.? Genette, Gйrard. 1980. Narrative Discourse. Ithaca: Cornell University Press. Hawthorn, Jeremy. 1985. Studying the Novel. An Introduction. London and New York: Edward Arnold. Lodge, David. 1992. The Art of Fiction. Harmondsworth: Penguin. Lothe, Jakob. 2000. Narrative in Fiction and Film : an Introduction, Oxford: Oxford University Press. Mattherson, Stephen and Darryl Jones. 2000. Studying Poetry. London: Arnold. Prince, G. 1991. A Dictionary of Narratology. Great Britain: Scholar Press. Probyn, Clive T. 1984. English Poetry. London: Longman. Rimmon-Kenan, Shlomith. 1983. Narrative Fiction: Contemporary Poetics. London: Methuen. Spurr, Barry. 1997. Studying Poetry. Melbourne: Macmillan. Tacca, Oscar. 1978. Las voces de la novela. Madrid: Gredos. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Carlos Villar Flor 125
Programas 2010/2011
2052008
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2052008 VARIEDADES DEL INGLЙS I
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 3
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 8
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 4
Prбcticos Aula 2
Prбcticos Laboratorio 2
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ This course presents and analyses a selection of geographical varieties of the English language. Students are introduced to the most representative accents and dialects of the British Isles, the United States of America, Canada, and Australia. Using Received Pronunciation as a point of reference, students will be presented with the phonological, morphological, and grammatical characteristics which make each of these dialects distinctive. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ 1. Introduction. 2. Dialects of the British Isles: morphology, syntax, vocabulary, and spelling. 2.1. RP. 2.2. London. 2.3. Norwich. 2.4. Liverpool. 2.5. South Wales. 2.6. Edinburgh. 2.7. Dublin. 3. English varieties of the United States of America: morphology, syntax, vocabulary, and spelling. 3.1. General American. 3.2. New England. 3.3. New York, Philadelphia, and Northern America. 3.4. Southern American English. 3.5. West and Mid-West American English. 4. Canadian English: morphology, syntax, vocabulary, and spelling. 5. Australian English: morphology, syntax, vocabulary, and spelling. 6. Pidgins and creoles. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__D__E__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__E__N__L_A__B_O__R__A_T__O__R_I_O__Y__C__A_M__P__O___________________________________ 1. Dialects of the British Isles: phonology. 1.1. RP. 1.2. London. 1.3. Norwich. 1.4. Liverpool. 1.5. South Wales. 1.6. Edinburgh. 1.7. Dublin. 2. English varieties of the United States of America: phonology. 2.1. General American. 2.2. New England. 2.3. New York, Philadelphia, and Northern America. 2.4. Southern American English. 2.5. West and Mid-West American English. 3. Canadian English: phonology. 4. Australian English: phonology.
126
Programas 2010/2011 __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Final marks will depend on: 1. A written exam at the end of the term (80%). 2. An exercise in which students will be asked to analyse on their own selected fragments of spoken texts from a phonological, morphological, grammatical, and lexical point of view. They will also have to decide on the dialect they belong to. This exercise will be carried out individually or in pairs depending on the number of students taking the subject. A printed copy will be handed in to the teachers by the end of April. Corrected exercises will be shared with the rest of students in the discussion group Pair Tasks. All resulting exercises will be liable to be a part of the written exam (20%). __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Bauer, L. 2002. An Introduction to International Varieties of English. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press. Bryson, B. 1990. Mother Tongue: The English Language. Harmondsworth: Penguin. Elmes, S. 2006. Talking for Britain: A Journey Through the Nations Dialects. Harmondsworth: Penguin. Dumas, B, 2006. Varieties of American English. Blackwell. Hughes, A. & P. Trudgill. 1996. English Accents and Dialects (Third Edition). London & New York: Arnold. Freeborn, D., P. French & D. Langford. 1993. Varieties of English (Second Edition). London: MacMillan. ODonnel, W.R. & L. Todd. 1995. Variety in Contemporary English (Second edition). London: Routledge. Schneider, E. W. et al. (eds.) 2004. A Handbook of Varieties of English. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. Trudgill, P. 1994. The Dialects of England. Oxford UK & Cambridge USA: Blackwell. Trudgill, P. & J. Hannah. 1994. International English. London & New York: Arnold. Upton, Clive. 2006. An Atlas of English Dialects. London: Routledge. Wakelin, M. 1985. Discovering English Dialects. Bucks: Shire Publications Ltd. Wells, J.C. 1982. Accents of English. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Marнa del Mar Asensio Arуstegui Juan Manuel Molina Valero [email protected] [email protected] 127
Programas 2010/2011
2052009
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2052009 PRБCTICAS DE MORFOSINTAXIS INGLESA
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 3
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 1,5
Teуricos 0
Prбcticos Aula 1,5
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ Tras cursar esta asignatura el alumno serб capaz de hacer un anбlisis sintбctico categorial y funcional de frases, clбusulas y oraciones en inglйs. El trabajo en esta asignatura se centra en la discusiуn de enunciados en lengua inglesa, con йnfasis en la motivaciуn semбntica y pragmбtica de las estructuras sintбcticas. La lengua de las clases, los trabajos de curso y los exбmenes serб el inglйs. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ 1. Lexical categories 2. Syntactic categories 3. Word functions 4. Phrase functions __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Cada alumno podrб optar por evaluarse de manera continua o por medio de un examen final. La evaluaciуn continua se basarб en la asistencia a clase (obligatoria todos los dнas del curso si se opta por esta modalidad) y en la realizaciуn de tareas prбcticas, que deberбn entregarse cada dнa al final de la clase. Antes del ъltimo dнa de clase del cuatrimestre se publicarбn las calificaciones de la evaluaciуn continua. Los alumnos que hayan superado esta fase no deberбn presentarse a examen final. La calificaciуn mбxima que se puede obtener por medio de la evaluaciуn continua es de Aprobado. Si se ha optado por la evaluaciуn continua, para obtener la calificaciуn de Notable, Sobresaliente o Matrнcula de Honor serб necesario haber obtenido la calificaciуn de Aprobado en la evaluaciуn continua y mejorar la calificaciуn en el examen final. En caso de optar por el examen final, la calificaciуn serб la obtenida en el examen. Los criterios de evaluaciуn del examen final serбn los siguientes: (i) conocimiento y comprensiуn de los tуpicos teуricos de la asignatura; (ii) capacidad de resolver problemas prбcticos de morfosintaxis inglesa; (iii) rigor terminolуgico y precisiуn del lenguaje empleado; (iv) capacidad de argumentar en aspectos de morfosintaxis inglesa; y (v) fluidez y correcciуn de la lengua inglesa. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Levin, B. 1993. English Verb Classes and Alternations. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press. McCawley, J. 1998. The Syntactic Phenomena of English. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press. Van Valin, R. 2001. An Introduction to Syntax. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Van Valin, R. 2005. Exploring the Syntax-Semantics Interface. Cambridge University Press. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Roberto Torre Alonso
128
Programas 2010/2011
2052010
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2052010 COMENTARIO FILOLУGICO DE TEXTOS
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 3
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 1,5
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 0
Prбcticos Aula 1,5
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ Esta es la parte prбctica de un curso de iniciaciуn a la historia de la lengua inglesa cuyo objetivo general es que los alumnos tengan una visiуn panorбmica del inglйs en su vertiente diacrуnica. Mбs concretamente, se pretende que los alumnos: - Se familiaricen con los conceptos de lengua como cambio y lengua como uso. - Sean capaces de describir los grandes periodos de la historia del inglйs desde el punto de vista fonolуgico, morfosintбctico y lйxico-semбntico. - Comprendan la interrelaciуn entre factores histуricos y culturales y el desarrollo de la lengua inglesa. - Identifiquen los rasgos histуricos que perviven en el inglйs contemporбneo __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ Unit 1: The Old English period. Lesson 1: Old English phonetics and phonology Lesson 2: Old English morphology and syntax Lesson 3: Old English lexicon and semantics UNIT 2: THE MIDDLE ENGLISH PERIOD. Lesson 4: Middle English phonetics and phonology Lesson 5: Middle English morphology and syntax Lesson 6: Middle English lexicon and semantics UNIT 3: THE EARLY-MODERN ENGLISH PERIOD. Lesson 7: Early-Modern English phonetics and phonology Lesson 8: Early-Modern English morphology and syntax Lesson 9: Early-Modern English lexicon and semantics __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__D__E__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__E__N__L_A__B_O__R__A_T__O__R_I_O__Y__C__A_M__P__O___________________________________ El trabajo en esta asignatura se centra en la discusiуn y el comentario de textos. Tanto en las sesiones teуricas como en las clases prбcticas, el trabajo en esta asignatura se centra en la discusiуn y el comentario de textos y niveles lingьнsticos. Se anima a los alumnos a tomar parte en las sesiones teуrico-prбcticas. La lengua de las clases, los trabajos de curso y los exбmenes serб el inglйs. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Cada alumno podrб optar por evaluarse de manera continua (A) o por medio de un examen final (B). A. La evaluaciуn continua se basarб en la asistencia a clase (obligatoria en un 85% si se opta por esta modalidad) y en la realizaciуn de varios trabajos individuales y en grupo a lo largo del curso. Antes del ъltimo dнa de clase del cuatrimestre se publicarбn las calificaciones de la evaluaciуn continua. Los alumnos que hayan superado esta fase no deberбn presentarse a examen final. La calificaciуn mбxima que se puede obtener por medio de la evaluaciуn continua es de Sobresaliente. Para obtener la calificaciуn de Matrнcula de Honor serб necesario haber obtenido la calificaciуn de Sobresaliente en la evaluaciуn continua y mejorar la calificaciуn en el examen final. B. Los criterios de evaluaciуn del examen final serбn los siguientes: (i) conocimiento y comprensiуn de los tуpicos teуricos de la asignatura; (ii) rigor terminolуgico y precisiуn del lenguaje empleado; (iii) capacidad de comentar y contextualizar los rasgos identificados en los distintos niveles; y (iv) fluidez y correcciуn de la lengua inglesa.
129
Programas 2010/2011 __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Baker, Peter. 2003. Introduction to Old English. Oxford: Blackwell. Also Available electronically at: http://www.wmich.edu/medieval/resources/IOE/index.html Bammesberger, Alfred. 1992. "The place of English in Germanic in Indo-European," In Hogg (Ed.), 1992. Bosworth, Joseph, and Northcote Toller. 1898. An Anglo-Saxon Dictionary. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Campbell, Lyle. 2000. Historical linguistics: an introduction. Cambridge (Massachusetts): The MIT Press. Clark Hall, John R. 1916 (1894). A Concise Anglo-Saxon Dictionary. Cambridge: C.U.P. Conde Silvestre, Juan Camilo, Sбnchez Pйrez, Aquilino and Juan Manuel Hernбndez Campoy. 1996. An introduction to the history of the English language. Murcia: ICE Universidad de Murcia. Freeborn, D. 1992. From Old English to Standard English. London: MacMillan. Hogg, Richard. 1992. The Cambridge History of the English Language. (4 Volumes). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Joseph, J. 2002. From Whitney to Chomsky. Essays in the history of American Linguistics. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Lass, Roger. 1994. Old English. A Historical Companion. Cambridge: C.U.P. Pyles, Thomas and John Algeo. 1982 (1973). The origins and development of the English language. Orlando: Harcourt Brace. Schendl, Herbert. 2001. Historical linguistics. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Smith, J. 1996. An Historical Study of English. Function, Form and Change. London: Routledge. Smith, J. 1999. Essentials of Early English. London: Routledge. Referencias online: Bosworth and Toller's dictionary: http://beowulf.engl.uky.edu/~kiernan/BT/Bosworth-Toller.htm Clark Hall's dictionary: http://www.ling.upenn.edu/~kurisuto/germanic/oe_clarkhall_about.html#images Etymological dictionary: http://www.etymonline.com/ For a brief outline of the main historical events involving linguistic change: http://www.englishclub.com/english-language-history.htm Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Roberto Torre Alonso 130
Programas 2010/2011
2052011
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2052011 GRAMБTICA INGLESA III
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 4
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 4
Prбcticos Aula 2
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ This course is designed as an introduction to the study of meaning and semantic theory. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ Lesson 1: Definition of semantics and connections with other linguistic disciplines Lesson 2: Connections with other non-linguistic disciplines Lesson 3: A brief history of semantics within linguistic theory Lesson 4: Some basic notions of objectivist semantics Lesson 5: Meaning, logic, and truth Lesson 6: Truth relations: entailments and presuppositions Lesson 7: Feature semantics and meaning relations Lesson 8: Lexical relations: lexical fields, lexical sets, and collocations Lesson 9: Beyond compositionality: prototype theory and the basic level of categorization Lesson 10: Semantics and encyclopaedic knowledge: the representation of propositional knowledge Lesson 11: Conceptual mappings: metaphor and metonymy Lesson 12: The experiential basis of meaning: image-schemas Students will have access to a wide set of on-line reading material, exercises, and activities based on the theoretical contents of the course. This material will be accessible through WebCT. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__D__E__P_R__Б_C__T_C__A__S__E_N__L__A_B__O__R_A__T_O__R__IO___Y_C__A__M__P_O____________________________________ Esta asignatura no tiene prбcticas de laboratorio ni de campo. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ The final mark will be based on the results of a written exam at the end of the semester. The exam will consist of three parts: (1) One extensive theoretical question (2) Two short theoretical questions (3) Three practical exercises. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Cann, R., Kempson, R. and E. Gregoromichelaki. 2009. Semantics : An Introduction to Meaning in Language. Cambridge, ; New York : Cambridge University Press, Cruse, A. 2000. An Introduction to Semantics and Pragmatics. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Goddard, C. 1998. Semantic Analysis. A Practical Introduction. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Leech, G. N. 1981. Semantics (2nd. ed.). Harmondsworth: Penguin. Saeed, J.I. 1997. Semantics. Oxford: Basil Blackwell. [More specific bibliographical references for each particular lesson will be provided on WebCT] Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Lorena Pйrez Hernбndez
131
Programas 2010/2011
2052013
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2052013 LINGЬНSTICA APLICADA INGLESA I
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 4
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ The five units of this subject are an introduction to some of the core topics of the field of Applied Linguistics and, most specifically, of the field of First Language Acquisition (L1). Therefore, the main objectives are: 1. To offer the student an overview of the origins, topics, and evolution of Applied Linguistics. 2. To introduce the student to the study of L1 Acquisition through the different theories of Psycholinguistics and Sociolinguistics. 3. To analyze some of the most relevant aspects of Psycholinguistics, such as the main theories of L1 Acquisition, the development of child language, or some language pathologies (e.g. types of aphasias). __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ Unit 1. Applied Linguistics: Currents, Concepts and Terminology. Unit 2. Theories of First Language Acquisition. Unit 3. Child Language. Unit 4. Language Pathology Unit 5. Research Methods in Language Acquisition. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ The total mark will be obtained via (1) a written exam (70% of the final mark), based on the contents of the subject, and (2) an essay on a topic of this subject, which will be discussed with the teacher in advance (30% of the final mark). The essay will be submitted at the end of the semester. At the beginning of the semester, the teacher will notify the students of the exact submission date. Students' active participation in the different practical parts proposed by the teacher will serve to round up the final mark. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ AITCHISON, J. (1976/1996): The Articulate Mammal. Londres: Unwin Hyman. AITCHISON, J. (1994): Words in the Mind. Londres: Arnold. ANULA, A. (1998): El abecй de la psicolingьнstica. Madrid. BAKER; C. (1993): Foundations of Bilingual Education and Bilingualism. Clevedon: Multilingual Matters. BELINCHON; M. IGOA, JM, & A, RIVIERE (1992): Psicologнa del lenguaje. Investigaciуn y teorнa. Madrid: Editorial Trotta. BERKO, J. (1993): The Development of Language. Nueva York: Macmillan. FLETCHER; P. & M, GARMAN (1986, 1990): Language Acquisition: Studies in First Language Development. Cambridge: CUP. GOODLUCK, H. (1991/1996): Language Acquisition. Londres: Blackwell. GRABE, W. & R, KAPLAN (eds.): Introduction to Applied Linguistics. Addison-Wesley. HERNБNDEZ PINA, F. (1994): Teorнas psicosocio-lingьнsticas y su aplicaciуn a la adquisiciуn del espaсol como lengua materna. Madrid: Siglo XXI. HOLMES, J. (1992): An Introduction to Sociolinguistics. Londres: Longman. LУPEZ ORNAT, S. P. GALLO & S. MARISCAL (1994): La adquisiciуn de la lengua espaсola: Madrid: Siglo XXI.
132
Programas 2010/2011 MARCOS, F. & J, SБNCHEZ (1988): Lingьнstica Aplicada. Madrid: Editorial Sнntesis. PINKER, S. (1995): The Language Instinct. How the Mind Creates Language. Nueva York: E. Morrow. Co. STILWELL.J. (1994): Child Language. Londres: Routledge. Note: The complete handouts of each syllabus unit including specific references will be uploaded to the Campus virtual at the beginning of the semester: http://www.campusvirtual.unirioja.es. Note: A selection of resources will be uploaded to the Campus virtual during the course: http://www.campusvirtual.unirioja.es. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Almudena Fernбndez Fontecha 133
Programas 2010/2011
2052014
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2052014 TEORНA DE LA TRADUCCIУN I (EN INGLЙS)
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 4
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Teуricos 4
Prбcticos Aula 2
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ 1) Introducir al alumno a la teorнa y prбctica de la traducciуn y a la comparaciуn de los sistemas de expresiуn entre el inglйs y el castellano. 2) Proporcionar al alumno una base teуrica asн como estrategias de traducciуn fundamentadas en los postulados de la lingьнstica contemporбnea. 3) Desarrollar la metacogniciуn lingьнstica tanto en inglйs como en castellano mediante la reflexiуn, discusiуn y prбctica de traducciуn. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ 1. Definiciуn. Concepto y Fundamentos de la traducciуn: traducciуn, traducir, interpretaciуn y transliteraciуn; la traducciуn como proceso de comunicaciуn; la traducciуn como arte y como ciencia. 2. Procesos y estrategias de la traducciуn: modulaciуn, trasposiciуn, explicitaciуn, equivalencia, reducciуn, adaptaciуn, transliteraciуn. Ejemplos prбcticos y comentarios de traducciуn. Procedimientos en la traducciуn de un texto. 3. Anбlisis contrastivo y traducciуn: el inglйs como lengua fuente y el castellano como lengua tйrmino, anбlisis de puntos conflictos en la traducciуn de estas dos lenguas. Traducciуn de ejemplos morfolуgicos, sintбcticos, lйxico y discursivos. La traducciуn del lenguaje figurado. 4. El receptor y el traductor: tipos de receptor, enfoques de traducciуn, identificaciуn del tipo de receptor a partir de distintos textos. Discusiуn del enfoque de traducciуn segъn el tipo de texto y la finalidad del mismo. Competencia y formaciуn del traductor. 5. Tipologнa de textos: elementos del texto, clasificaciуn de textos. El texto cientнfico y el texto literario. Caracterнsticas y estrategias de traducciуn. __P__L_A__N_I_F_I_C__A_C__I_У_N___T_E_M__P__O_R__A__L__________________________________________________________________ Aproximadamente se dedicarбn 6 horas a la unidad 1, 8 horas a la unidad 2, 16 horas a la unidad 3 y 15 horas a las unidades 4 y 5 respectivamente. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__D__E__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__E__N__L_A__B_O__R__A_T__O__R_I_O__Y__C__A_M__P__O___________________________________ Al comienzo de cada unidad se entregarб a los estudiantes un listado actualizado de las prбcticas y de las lecturas obligatorias que se deberбn realizar tanto en clase como vнa online. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Examen final: puntuaciуn total 25 puntos Dicho examen estarб basado en los contenidos y prбcticas realizadas a lo largo del curso tanto en clase presencial como online. Estarб compuesto de tres partes: Parte I: Definiciones y discusiуn de tйrminos y conceptos (10 puntos) Parte II: Traducciуn sin diccionario y comentario de las tйcnicas y estrategias de traducciуn utilizadas (10 puntos). Parte III: Preguntas especнficas sobre las lecturas obligatorias (5 puntos) Para aprobar el examen es imprescindible que el estudiante obtenga una nota mнnima de aprobado en cada una de las partes. La nota del examen constituirб el 80% de la nota final de la asignatura. La
134
Programas 2010/2011 participaciуn activa en las sesiones junto con la realizaciуn de las actividades online supondrб el 20% restante de la calificaciуn final. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ BAKER, M. (1992): In Other Words. Londres: Routledge. BAKER, M. (ED) (1998): Routledge Encyclopedia of Translation Studies. Londres: Routdlege. BASSNET, S. (1991/1996): Translation Studies. Londres: Routledge. BELL, R. (1991): Translation and Translating. Harlow: Longman. BHATIA, V. (1993): Analysing Genre. Londres: Longman. GARCIA YEBRA, V. (1982): Teorнa y Prбctica de la Traducciуn. Madrid: Gredos. GILE, D. (1995): Basic Concepts and Models for Interpreter and Translator Training. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. HATCH, E. 91992): Discourse and Language Education. N York: CUP. HATIN, B. & I, MASON (1997): The Translator as Communicator. Londres: Routledge. HATIM, B. & J, MUNDAY (2004). Translation. An advanced resource book. Londres: Routledge. LARSON, M. (1984): Meaning-based Translation. Boston: University Press of America. J LORSCHER, W. (1991): Translation Performance, Translation Process, and Translation Strategies. Tьbingen: Gunter Narr Verlag. MERINO, J. & S, TAYLOR 2002. Manual Prбctico de Traducciуn Directa Inglйs-Espaсol. Madrid: Anglo Didбctica Publishing. MUNDAY, J. 2006. Introducing Translation Studies. Theories and Applications. Londres: Routledge. NEWMARK, P. (1987): The Translation Textbook. Londres: Prentice-Hall. NEWMARK, P. (1991): About Translation. Clevedon: Multilingual Matters. SAEED,J.(1997): Semantics. Cambridge, Mass.: Blackwell. SAMUELSSON-BROWN, G. (1993): A Practical Guide for Translators. Clevedon: Multilingual Matters. THORNBURY, S. (1997): About Language. Cambridge: CUP. TORRE, E. (1994): Teorнa de la Traducciуn Literaria. Madrid: E Sнntesis. VAZQUEZ AYORA, G. (1977): Introducciуn a la Traductologнa. Georgetown: G University Press. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Andrйs Canga Alonso 135
Programas 2010/2011
2052015
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2052015 GRAMБTICA INGLESA IV
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 4
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 4
Prбcticos Aula 2
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ Ofrecer al alumno una panorбmica amplia de los factores que inciden en el uso comunicativo de la lengua inglesa, desde la perspectiva de diferentes escuelas de pensamiento. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ 1. NATURE AND SCOPE OF PRAGMATICS. DEFINING PRAGMATICS: SENSE, REFERENCE, INTENTIONALITY. UTTERANCE MEANING. FORCE. INTERACTION STRATEGIES. 2. SPEECH ACT THEORY. J. L. AUSTIN. TRUTH CONDITIONS VERSUS FELICITY CONDITIONS. PERFORMATIVES. LOCUTION, ILLOCUTION, PERLOCUTION. J. SEARLE AND INDIRECT SPEECH ACTS. 3. CONVERSATIONAL IMPLICATURE. THE GRICEAN PARADIGM: GRICES COOPERATIVE PRINCIPLE AND CONVERSATIONAL MAXIMS. LEECHS POLITENESS PRINCIPLE AND POLITENESS MAXIMS. OTHER ACCOUNTS OF MAXIMS. 4. POST-GRICEAN PRAGMATICS I. LEVINSONS THEORY OF GENERALIZED CONVERSATIONAL IMPLICATURE. HEURISTICS. DEDUCTIVE, INDUCTIVE, AND ABDUCTIVE REASONING. OTHER FORMS OF REASONING: PRACTICAL REASONING AND DEFAULT LOGICS. 5. POST-GRICEAN PRAGMATICS II. RELEVANCE THEORY. COMMUNICATION AND COGNITION. CODE VERSUS INFERENTIAL MODELS OF COMMUNICATION. MUTUAL MANIFESTNESS. OSTENSION. THE PRINCIPLE OF RELEVANCE. CRITERIA OF RELEVANCE. IMPLICATURES VERSUS EXPLICATURES. LOOSE USES OF LANGUAGE. AD HOC CONCEPT CONSTRUCTION. METAPHOR, METONYMY, AND OTHER TROPES. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__D__E__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__E__N__L_A__B_O__R__A_T__O__R_I_O__Y__C__A_M__P__O___________________________________ No hay. Se realizan prбcticas en el aula, mediante resoluciуn de ejercicios prбcticos __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ EXAMEN OBLIGATORIO __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Davis, S. (ed.) Pragmatics. A Reader. New York: Oxford University Press. Green, G. M. 1996. Pragmatics and Natural Language Understanding. Hillsadale, N.J.: Lawrence Erlbaum. 2nd. ed. Leech, G. 1983. The Principles of Pragmatics. London: Longman. Levinson, S. C. 1983. Pragmatics. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Levinson, S. C. 2000. Presumptive Meanings. The Theory of Generalized Conversational Implicature. Cambridge, Mass.: The MIT Press. Mey, J. 1993. Pragmatics. An Introduction. Oxford: Basil Blackwell. (2nd ed. 2001) Pйrez Hernбndez, L. 2001. Illocution and Cognition. A Constructional Approach. Universidad de La Rioja. Prensas Universitarias. Ruiz de Mendoza, F. & Otal, J. L. 2002. Metonymy, Grammar, and Communication. Granada: Comares. Colecciуn Estudios de Lengua Inglesa.
136
Programas 2010/2011 Ruiz de Mendoza Ibбсez, Francisco Josй and Annalisa Baicchi. 2007. "Illocutionary constructions: cognitive motivation and linguistic realization." Explorations in Pragmatics: Linguistic, Cognitive, and Intercultural Aspects, ed. by Istvan Kecskes and Laurence Horn, 95-128. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. Sperber, D. & Wilson, D. 1986. Relevance. Communication and Cognition. Oxford: Basil Blackwell. (2nd ed. 1995). Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Francisco Josй Ruiz de Mendoza Ibбсez 137
Programas 2010/2011
2052016
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2052016 COMENTARIO DE TEXTOS INGLESES II
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 4
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ This course is meant to teach students how to read critically and to interpret a variety of so-called non- literary texts. Students will be encouraged to use their previous knowledge of both linguistic and narrative tools. They will also be provided with complementary ideological tools and practical strategies. The main focus of the course will be laid on the analysis of individual texts. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_____________________________________________ Since one of the main objectives of this course is to examine the ways in which language conveys ideology, there will be a search for an awareness of the different kinds of vocabularies and discourses that have been historically used to make sense of the world. The bible, Amerindian narratives of origins, paintings, political tracts, historical documents, etc. will be used to unearth the strategies that both verbal and visual languages employ to rationalize power and cruelty. Additionally, we will deal with Story ­-regarded as a mental structure which supports traditional notions of identity­ within its extra-literary scope. We will also look at the relationship between aesthetics and ethics in different literary movements of some English-speaking countries, using verbal and visual texts (mainly paintings) in order to analyse the ways in which issues of identity, environment, gender, race, or sexuality are represented. 0. Introduction: Language and ideology. 1. Interpretation and the role of genre. 2. Creation stories. 3. Storytelling and testimony writing. 4. Religion, science, and knowledge. 5. Literature, painting, and ethics. 6. The language of advertising. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ There will be two possible evaluation methods. A) The final mark will be the result of a written exam at the end of the term, plus the partial marks obtained through the students presentations in class and the exercises submitted on the web. The presentations for the course will mandatorily be in-class exercises, to be made in the class and on the established dates. The exercises on the web will also have to be submitted by the established deadlines. B) An optional evaluation system ­to be considered by the teacher each academic year­ will be to eliminate the written exam; this working schedule regards presentations and online exercises as the only assignments during the course. Opting for this second assessment system will depend on the students' engagement and participation in the classes and in the course's website. Important notice: If the assessment method A is chosen, the final grade will be an average of the exam, the student's performance in class, and the online exercises. The presentations and the online exercises are compulsory tasks for every student. If these activities are not carried out within the established deadlines, a maximum of 3 marks will be deducted from the final exam grade. In method B, all students have to do all presentations in class and on the established dates in order to get a pass for the course.
138
Programas2009/2010 __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Students will be expected to read a series of texts compiled by the teacher in a reader (section "aprendizaje/contenidos") that will be available by the beginning of the course. References - Theodore Adorno. "Commitment". In Revolutions of the Word: Intellectual Contexts for the Study of Modern Literature. Ed. Patricia Waugh. London: Arnold. 1997: 198-202. Anonymous. "The Six Species of Men" (1866). In Popular American Literature of the 19th Century. Ed. Paul Gutjahr. New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press. 752-780 - Atwood, Margaret. "Bread". In Bones and Murder. Virago, 1955. (129-133) - Atwood, Margaret. "Descent: Negotiating with the Dead Who Makes the Trip to the Underworld and Why?" Negotiating with the Dead. A Writer on Writing. Cambridge UP 2002.(153-181) - Berger, John. 1972. Ways of Seeing. Chapter 3. London: British Broadcasting Corporation and Penguin Books. 45-64. - Coward, Rosalind. 1885. "The Look". Female Desires: How They Are Sought, Bought and Packaged. New York: Grove Press. - Dubrow, Heather. "Introduction". In Genre. London and New York: Methuen, 1982: 1-7. - Max Eastman "Practical and Poetical People". From Enjoyment of Poetry: With Other Essays on Aesthetics. Charles Scribner's Sons. (Included in Sarah Norton and Nell Waldman's Canadian Content, 1988: 110-11). - King, Tomas. "The One About Coyote Going West" All My Relations: An Anthology. of Contemporary Canadian Native Fiction. Ed. Thomas King. McClelland & Stewart. 1992: 95-106. - Fereyabend, Paul. "Against the Method". (1978). In Revolutions of the Word: Intellectual Contexts for the Study of Modern Literature. Ed. Patricia Waugh. London: Arnold. 1997: 265-269. - Frye, Northrop "Donґt You Think It's Time to Start Thinking?" The Toronto Star, Jan. 25, 1986 Genesis. "In the Beginning". Reading the American Past: Selected Historical Documents. Vol I: to 1877. Ed. Michael P. Johnson. New York: Bedford/St. Martin's. 4-7. - Feyerabend, Paul. "Introduction" from Against Method. In Revolutions of the Word: Intellectual Contexts for the Study of Modern Literature. Ed. Patricia Waugh. 1997: London: Arnold. 265-269 - Furmanski, Jacques. "Conversation with a Dead Man". In Art from the Ashes. A Holocaust Anthology. Ed. Lawrence L. Langer. Oxford UP, 1995 :72-74. - Genesis. "In the Beginning". Reading the American Past: Selected Historical Documents. Vol I: to 1877. Ed. Michael P. Johnson. New York: Bedford/St. Martin's. 4-7. - Langer, Lawrence. "On Writing and reading Holocaust Literature". In Art from the Ashes: A Holocaust Anthology. Ed. Lawrence L. Langer. Oxford UP, 1995: 3-9. - Loewen, James. W. "1493: The True Importance of Christopher Columbus" In Lies My Teacher Told Me: Everything About American History You Got Wrong. New York: Simon & Shuster, 1995:37-74. - Lye, John. "Ideology: A Brief Guide": http://www.brocku.ca/english/jlye/ideology.html - Norton, Sarah and Nell Waldman: "How to Write to Be Understood". Canadian Content: Essays for Composition from Canada, Britain, and the United States. Toronto: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1988 6-14. - Moss, Steve. Ed. The World's Shortest Stories. Running Press, 1995. - Ozick, Cynthia. 1990 (1980). The Shawl. New York: Vintage Books. 3-10 - Pointon, Marcia. "Romanticism in English Art". The Context of English Literature: The Romantics. Ed. Stephen Prickett. London: Methuen. 1981. 77-114 - Schmied, Wieland: "Faces of Romanticism: Friedrich, Delacroix, Turner, Constable". In The Romantic Spirit in German Art (1790-1990). Ed. Keith Hartley. Edinburgh: Royal Scottish Academy and the Fruit Market Gallery. 1994. 28-35. - Vaugham, William. "Romanticism". In The Romantic Spirit in German Art (1790-1990). Ed. Keith - Hartley. Edinburgh: Royal Scottish Academy and the Fruit Market Gallery. 1994. 210-211. - "The Woman Who Fell from the Sky". A Seneca Origin Narrative. Reading the American Past: Selected Historical Documents. Vol I: to 1877. Ed. Michael P. Johnson. New York: Bedford/St. Martin's. 2-4 Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ. Jesъs Hernбez Lerena 139
Programas 2010/2011
2052017
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2052017 LENGUA INGLESA VI
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 4
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ This course is designed to prepare university students of the last year of philology to meet a level equivalent to that of the Cambridge Proficiency Examination. Emphasis is placed on the following language skills: vocabulary, fluency, intonation, rhythm, and using more advanced constructions in English. In writing, organization and development in different written formats, and ability to comprehend aspects such as double entendre, innuendo, and literary connotations, or other contexts is expected. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ The theoretical and practical approach will be based on units 8-14 of Focus on Proficiency (see bibliography); Part two of Story Time; The students are required to read the following text: Cry the Beloved, by Alan Paton. Students should do work in the following areas: language and composition, reading comprehension, usage, listening comprehension, analysis of various writing genres, oral presentations. In the listed skills, students will have to meet the following standards: Fluency, incorporating introductory phrases, idioms, use of phrase and clause as modifiers in sentences, etc. Grammatical accuracy: antecedent agreement, accurate verb tense expansion etc. Pronunciation: rhythm and intonation. Maintenance of effective dialogue. Vocabulary: expansion to include words for specific subjects. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ The course grade will be based exclusively on the final examination and, to obtain a passing grade, at least 5 points out of ten should be achieved in the final written examination. The final examination will include the following components: Dictation Reading Comprehension Grammar exercises Compositions Review of Compulsory readings. Oral Interview The final grade will consist on the average assessment of all of them. Skills required will include: usage; pronunciation; form; content; unity in written work; and effective and fluent oral delivery. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Coursebooks: Proficiency Gold. 2000. Jacky Newbrook and Judith Wilson. London: Longman. Hernбez Lerena, Sullivan & Ojeda. 1998. Story Time. Logroсo: Servicio de Publicaciones, Universidad de La Rioja. Paton, Alan. Cry the Beloved, Penguin. Reference Books: Eastwood, J. 1992. Oxford Practice Grammar, Oxford: Oxford University Press. Greenbaum, S. & R. Quirk, R. 1992. A Students Grammar of the English Language. London: Longman. Greenbaum, S. & R. Quirk. 1985. A Comprehensive Grammar of the English Language. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
140
Programas 2010/2011 Hewings, M. 1999. Advanced Grammar in Use. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Leech, G. & J. Svartvik. 1995. A Communicative Grammar of English. London: Longman Murphy, R. 1994. English Grammar in Use. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Swan, M.1995. Practical English Usage. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Thomson, A. J. & Martinet, A.V. 1989. A Practical English Grammar. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Vince, M. 1996. First Certificate Language Practice. Oxford: MacMillan. Websters Third New International Dictionary. Chicago: Merriam Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Julieta Ojeda Alba 141
Programas 2010/2011
2052018
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2052018 LINGЬНSTICA APLICADA INGLESA II
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 4
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ 1. Introducir al estudiante en el estudio de las principales teorнas de aprendizaje de segundas lenguas y de los principales mйtodos y enfoques de enseсanza. 2. Integrar las teorнas de aprendizaje y de enseсanza de segundas lenguas en el marco de la comunicaciуn en el aula. 3. Ofrecer una visiуn de conjunto de los participantes, elementos e interrelaciones que intervienen en el aprendizaje del inglйs en el contexto formal del aula. 4.Explorar las implicaciones didбcticas de un enfoque constructivista de aprendizaje. 5. Presentar las principales corrientes teуricas y metodolуgicas en investigaciуn en la Lingьнstica Aplicada al aprendizaje y enseсanza de idiomas __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ UNIT 1: Basic concepts and terminology. UNIT 2: Communication, interaction, and the acquisition of a second language. UNIT 3: The context of learning: analysis of the language classroom in the Spanish secondary education. UNIT 4: The teenager as a language learner. UNIT 5: The language teacher in Spanish secondary education. La asignatura se basa fundamentalmente en la discusiуn de los contenidos presentados en las clases teуricas, crнtica de lecturas, ejercicios, discusiones, presentaciones orales, reconocimientos de mйtodos, anбlisis y diagnуstico de casos. __P__L_A__N_I_F_I_C__A_C__I_У_N___T_E_M__P__O_R__A__L__________________________________________________________________ La unidad 1 sirve como introducciуn a la asignatura y comprenderб aproximadamente 6 horas. El resto de las unidades tendrбn una duraciуn aproximada de 14 horas (tres semanas y media) cada una. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Examen final basado en las actividades desarrolladas en las clases y en las lecturas obligatorias. Comprenderб dos partes. En la primera parte se evaluarбn tйrminos, conceptos teуricos y aspectos prбcticos desarrollados en clase o como tareas complementarias encomendados a los estudiantes al comienzo de cada unidad. La puntuaciуn total de esta parte serб de 20 puntos. La segunda parte contendrб preguntas sobre puntos especнficos de las lecturas obligatorias. La puntuaciуn total de esta parte serб de 10 puntos. Para aprobar la asignatura es imprescindible aprobar cada una de las partes del examen. Los errores de gramбtica y vocabulario asн como un estilo de redacciуn pobre para el nivel de lengua inglesa en 4є curso se penalizarбn con la reducciуn de la puntuaciуn final. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Brown, H.D. 1987. Principles of Language Learning and Teaching. Englewood Cliffs, NJ.: Prentice Hall Regents. Cook, V. 1996: Second Language Learning and Language Teaching. London: Arnold. Ellis, R. 1995. The Study of Second Language Acquisition. Oxford: OUP.
142
Programas 2010/2011 Jimйnez Catalбn, RM. 1998. Lingьнstica Aplicada al Aprendizaje y Enseсanza del Inglйs. Servicio de Publicaciones de la Universidad de La Rioja. Johnson, K.E. 1995. Understanding Communication in Second Language Classrooms. Cambridge: CUP. Larsen-Freeman, D. 1986. Techniques and Principles in Language Teaching. Oxgord: OUP. Lightbown, P. & N, Spada 1993. How languages are learnt. Oxford: OUP. Numan, D. 1989. Understanding Language Classrooms. Londres: PRentice Hall International. Ribe, R. & N, VIdal 1995. La enseсanza de la lengua extranjera en la educaciуns secundaria. Madrid: Alhambra Longman. Richards, J. & R, Rodgers 1986. Approaches and Methods in Language Teaching & Applied Linguistics. London: Longman. Ur, P. 1996. A Course in Language Teaching. Cambridge: CUP. Williams, M. & R. L. Burden 1997. Psychology for Language Teachers. Cambridge. CUP. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Rosa Marнa Jimйnez Catalбn y MЄ. Pilar Agustнn LLach 143
Programas 2010/2011
2052019
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2052019 TEORНA DE LA TRADUCCIУN II (EN INGLЙS)
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 4
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Teуricos 4
Prбcticos Aula 2
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ This subject presupposes some fundamental knowledge gained in the subject Teorнa de la traducciуn I (en Inglйs). The first part of the subject deals with the translation of specialized languages (e.g. language of medicine, language of tourism, language of the media). The second part aims at giving an overview of Machine Translation (MT), as a valuable tool to assist human translation. Special emphasis will be given to the use of MT tools in the European Commission. Although this is a theoretical subject, its development has been planned around a number of practical tasks. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ PART 1. LANGUAGE VARIETY AND TRANSLATION Unit 1. Linguistic Variation and Translation Unit 2. Translation of Specialized Languages PART 2. MACHINE TRANSLATION Unit 3. Main Machine Translation Concepts Unit 4. Machine Translation History Unit 5. Machine Translation Systems __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ The total mark will be obtained via a written exam based on the contents of the subject. Students' active participation in the different practical parts proposed by the teacher will serve to round up the final mark. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ PART 1, UNIT 1 -Carbonell, O. 1999. Traducciуn y Cultura: de la ideologнa al texto. Salamanca: Ediciones Colegio de Espaсa. -Eggins, S. 1994. An introduction to systemic functional linguistics. London: Pinter. -Halliday et al. 1964. The Linguistic Sciences and Language Teaching. Harlow: Longman. -Hatim, I. and B. Mason. 1990. Discourse and the translator. London and New York: Longman. -Hutchinson, T. and A. Waters. 1987. English for Specific Purposes: A Learning-centred Approach. Cambridge: CUP. -Martin, J. R. 1992. English Text. Philadelphia: John Benjamins. -Schдffner, C. (ed.). 2002. The Role of Discourse Analysis for Translation and in Translator Training. Clevendon: Multilingual Matters. -Strevens, P. 1983. New Orientations in the Teaching of English. Oxford: OUP. -Trosborg, Anna. 1997. Text Typology: Register, Genre and Text Type. In Trosborg, A. 1997. Text Typology and Translation. Pp. 3-23. John Benjamins. -Werlich, E. 1976. A Text Grammar of English. Heidelberg: Quelle & Meyer.
144
Programas 2010/2011 PART 1, UNIT 2 -Beigdeber, F. 1995. Diccionario Tйcnico. Madrid: Dнaz de Santos. -Garcнa Yebra, V. 1983. En torno a la traducciуn. Madrid: Gredos. -Gutiйrrez Rodilla, B. M. 1988. La ciencia empieza en la palabra. Barcelona: Ediciones penнnsula. -Maillot, J. 1997. La Traducciуn cientнfica y tйcnica. Madrid: Gredos. -Mounin, G. 1963. Los problemas teуricos de la traducciуn. Madrid. Gredos. -Newmark, P. 1986. La enseсanza de la traducciуn especializada. Cuadernos de traducciуn e interpretaciуn, 7, 81-96. -Newmark, P. 1988. A textbook on Translation. Londres: Prentice Hall International. -Salager, F. 1985. Syntax and semantics of compound nominal phrases in medical English literature: a comparative study with Spanish. English for Specific Purposes, 9, 2: 145-159. PART 2, UNIT 2 -Arnold, D. et al. 1994. Machine Translation. An Introductory Guide. London: NCC Blackwell Ltd. ( yo can download a pdf version at: http://www.essex.ac.uk/linguistics/external/clmt/MTbook/). -Hutchins, W. J. and H. L. Sommers. 1995. Introducciуn a la traducciуn automбtica. Madrid: Visor. -Hutchins, W. J. 1986. Machine Translation: Past, Present, Future. Ellis Horwood/Wiley, Chichester/New York -Hutchins, W. J. 1999. The development and use of machine translation systems and computer-based translation tools. International Symposium on Machine Translation and Computer Language Information Processing, 26-28 June 1999. Beijing, China -HUTCHINS, W.J. and SOMMERS, H.L. 1995. Introducciуn a la Traducciуn Automбtica. Madrid: Visor. QUAH, C.K. 2006. Translation and Technology. Hampshire/New York: Palgrave Macmillan. Note: The complete handouts of each syllabus unit including specific references and a selection of resources will be uploaded to the Campus virtual (http://www.campusvirtual.unirioja.es.) at the beginning of the semester. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Andrйs Canga Alonso. 145
Programas 2010/2011
2053006
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2053006 INGLЙS CIENTНFICO-TЙCNICO
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura Op
Curso 1cl
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 1,5
Prбcticos Laboratorio 1,5
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ El curso estб diseсado con el objetivo de dotar al estudiante de un nivel medio de conocimientos de las caracterнsticas gramaticales, semбnticas y lйxicas de los registros tйcnico y cientнfico de la lengua inglesa. Para conseguir este objetivo, a lo largo del curso se estudiarбn en detalle aquellas бreas de la gramбtica inglesa que son caracterнsticas de los textos y el discurso cientнfico-tйcnico, asн como el vocabulario especнfico de estos registros del inglйs. El objetivo final del curso es el de desarrollar las destrezas de expresiуn y comprensiуn escritas del estudiante de forma que quede capacitado para (1) entender textos cientнfico-tйcnicos especializados en lengua inglesa y (2) expresar sus conocimientos sobre la ciencia y la tecnologнa en inglйs. Junto a estos objetivos generales, se persigue tambiйn familiarizar e interesar al estudiante en los recursos y las posibilidades que Internet ofrece para el aprendizaje y el perfeccionamiento del inglйs cientнfico- tйcnico. De esta forma, cada lecciуn incluirб secciones especнficas con enlaces a pбginas web en las que se pueden encontrar ejercicios adicionales relacionados con los contenidos aprendidos, textos ingleses sobre el tema desarrollado, bibliografнa adicional, etc. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ Lecciуn 1: El inglйs de las Matemбticas Lecciуn 2: El inglйs de la Quнmica Lecciуn 3: El inglйs de la Ingenierнa Mecбnica Lecciуn 4: El inglйs de la Ingenierнa Elйctrica Lecciуn 5: El inglйs de la Ingenierнa Agrнcola Lecciуn 6: El inglйs de la Ingenierнa Informбtica __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__D__E__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__E__N__L_A__B_O__R__A_T__O__R_I_O__Y__C__A_M__P__O___________________________________ Las prбcticas de laboratorio servirбn para profundizar en el conocimiento del vocabulario tйcnico y las estructuras gramaticales correspondientes a cada una de las lecciones del temario. Dada su naturaleza, se harб uso del laboratorio de idiomas para realizar ejercicios de listening relacionados. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ La prueba de evaluaciуn consistirб en un examen (escrito) presencial a final de cuatrimestre. La evaluaciуn serб coherente con los objetivos, contenidos y actividades realizadas durante el perнodo de aprendizaje, tanto en lo que se refiere a la parte presencial como a la parte on-line de la asignatura. El examen constarб, por lo tanto, de dos partes: una referida al contenido impartido en la plataforma virtual y otra referida al contenido impartido de manera presencial, cada una de las cuales supondrб un 50% de la nota final. Los ejercicios serбn similares a los realizados durante el curso (multiple choice questions, fill-in-the-gaps, matching, ejercicios de gramбtica, redacciуn/resumen, comprensiуn de textos, listening etc.) La fecha oficial del examen no se modificarб salvo en aquellos casos en los que exista incompatibilidad de dнa y hora con otro examen o fuerza mayor debidamente justificada. En el primer caso se deberб presentar justificaciуn mediante fotocopia de la matrнcula en la asignatura que es objeto de incompatibilidad. Los estudiantes que se encuentren en esta situaciуn deberбn comunicarlo a las profesoras antes del 30 de marzo.
146
Programas 2010/2011 BIBLIOGRAFНA BБSICA Chaplen, F. 1989. A Course in Intermediate Scientific English. Hong-Kong: Nelson. Glendinning, E. 1981.English in electrical engineering and electronics. Oxford : Oxford University Press. Jenkins-Murphy, A. 1981. The Language of Agriculture In English. New York: Regents Publishing Company, Inc. Lambert, V. and E. Murray. 2003. English For Work : everyday technical English. Edinburgh : Pearson. Miranda Garcнa, A. 2009. English for science and technology: notional description and writing practice. Mбlaga : Universidad de Mбlaga, Servicio de Publicaciones e Intercambio Cientнfico. Pickett, N. A. et al. 2000. Technical English: writing, reading and speaking Longman. Remacha Esteras, S. 2002. English for computer users . Cambridge : Cambridge University Press. [Additional bibliographical references for each particular lesson will be provided on WebCT] Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Lorena Pйrez Hernбndez 147
Programas 2010/2011
2053007
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2053007 LITERATURA COMPARADA (INGLЙS-FRANCЙS)
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura Op
Curso 2cl
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ Poner en comunicaciуn la Literatura Inglesa y la Literatura Francesa durante similares perнodos histуricos ­Edad Media, siglo XVIII, siglo XIX­ y establecer influencias, semejanzas y diferencias entre los textos producidos en ambas tradiciones. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ 1. Literatura comparada: nociones generales. Definiciуn, nacimiento y evoluciуn del tйrmino. Situaciуn actual de la literatura comparada. Diferentes escuelas: francesa, positivista, norteamericana, otras escuelas europeas. Metodologнa. Interdisciplinariedad. Aportaciones metodolуgicas. 2. Estudios comparativos medievales: la narrativa caballeresca. 2.1 El tйrmino romance. Antecedentes histуricos: Geoffrey of Monmouth y Wace. Antecedentes literarios. El elemento celta. Caracterнsticas generales de las novelas artъricas. 2.2. Narrativa caballeresca inglesa: Sir Gawain and the Green Knight. 2.3. Geoffrey Chaucer: "The Wife of Bath's Tale" 2.4. Anбlisis comparativo de un elemento folklуrico. 3. Estudios comparativos de la tradiciуn oral: el cuento popular. 3.1. Caracterнsticas generales del cuento popular tradicional y del relato breve. Los cuentos populares de Perrault. 3.2. El cuento popular y sus versiones literarias: Estudio comparativo de las versiones del cuento de Barbazul segъn Perrault y los hermanos Grimm, y de Caperucita segъn Perrault. Reescrituras contemporбneas en inglйs. Angela Carter "The Bloody Chamber", "The Company of Wolves". James F. Garner: Politically Correct Bedtime Stories. 3.3. El cuento popular y sus versiones cinematogrбficas: Estudio comparativo de la versiуn literaria de Madame Leprince de Beaumont, La Bella y la Bestia y de la adaptaciуn cinematogrбfica de Jean Cocteau. 4. Estudios comparativos del siglo XIX 4.1. El tratamiento de los desfavorecidos en la novela inglesa y francesa de mediados del s. XIX: Los miserables y Oliver Twist (Se analizarбn las versiones cinematogrбficas recientes de Bille August y Roman Polanski respectivamente). __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ La evaluaciуn final de los conocimientos adquiridos por las personas matriculadas en la asignatura se realizarб basбndonos en: 1. Una exposiciуn en clase sobre un estudio comparativo literario o literario-cinematogrбfico. 2. La evaluaciуn continua a travйs de intervenciones en clase y de anбlisis puntuales sobre aspectos concretos del programa. En el caso de que en los puntos 1 y 2, el alumno no hubiera obtenido la puntuaciуn necesaria para aprobar la asignatura, se podrб presentar a un Examen final en las convocatorias oficiales. Este examen estarб compuesto por una parte teуrica y otra prбctica sobre los temas del Programa.
148
Programas 2010/2011 __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Fuentes primarias: - Chrйtien de Troyes: El libro de Perceval o El cuento del Grial. Trad. Josй Manuel Lucнa Megнas. Madrid: Gredos, 2000. Tambiйn en ediciуn bilingьe: Trad. Alain Verjat Masmann. Barcelona: Bosch, 1995. - Anуnimo: Sir Gawain and the Green Knight. London: The Folio Society, 1983. - Charles Perrault: Barbazul, Caperucita Roja en Cuentos de antaсo. Madrid: Anaya, 1985. - Geoffrey Chaucer, "The Wife of Bath's Tale", "The Nun's Priest's Tale", en Canterbury Tales, London: Penguin, 2005. - Angela Carter: The Bloody Chamber, "The Company of Wolves", en The Bloody Chamber and Other Stories. London: Vintage, 1995. - James Finn Garner Politically Correct Bedtime Stories, London: Souvenir Press, 1995. - Madame Leprince de Beaumont, "La Bella y la Bestia". En La Bella y la Bestia y otros cuentos. Trad. Elena del Amo; Ilust. Бngel Domнnguez. Madrid: Gaviota, 1992. Versiones cinematogrбficas: Jean Cocteau La Belle et la bкte, 1946 Roman Polanski Oliver Twist, 2005. Bille August Les misйrables, 1998. Fuentes Secundarias: ACTES DU VII CONGRИS DE LґASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL DE LITTЙRATURE COMPARЙE. Montrйal-Ottawa, 1973. (Ed. Stuttgart, Bieber, Kunst und Wissen, 1979, 2 vols.) BRANDT-CORSTIUS, J., Introduction to the Comparative Study of Literature. New York, Random House, 1968. BRUNEL, P., PICHOIS, C. Y ROUSSEAU, A.M., Quґest-ce que la Littйrature comparйe?. Paris, Colin, 1983. BRUNEL, P., Lґйtude des mythes en Littйrature comparйe en Sensus Communis. Contemporary trends in comparative literature. Panorama de la situation actuelle en littйrature comparйe, IX. Tьbingen, Narr, 1986, pp. 117-123. CIORANESCU, A., Principios de Literatura Comparada. La Laguna, Universidad, 1964. CLAUDON, F., La Littйrature comparйe et les arts en Neohelicon XVI, 1, 1989, pp. 259-284. CLIFFORD, P., Bibliography of comparative literature in Britain en Comparative Criticism II, 1980, pp. 335-342. COMPAGNON A., La seconde main, ou le travail de la citation. Paris, Ed. du Seuil, 1979. Comparatits at Work: Studies in Comparative Literature. Ed. by Stephen G. Nichols and Richard B. Vowles. Blaisdell Publishing Company, 1968. CROCE, B. , La letteratura comparata en Problemi di estetica, 2Є ed., Bari, Laterza, pp. 71-76, 1923. ETIEMBLE, E., Comparaison nґest pas raison. La crise de la littйrature comparйe. Paris, Gallimard, 1963. FOKKEMA, D.W., Comparative Literature and the New Paradigm en Canadian Review of Comparative Literature. Revue Canadienne de Littйrature Comparйe, IX, March 1982, Toronto, pp. 1-18. GENETTE, G., Palimpsestes. La littйrature au second degrй. Paris, Seuil (Points), 1982. GIFFORD, H., Comparative Literature. London, Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1969. GUILLEN, C., Entre lo uno y lo diverso. Introducciуn a la Literatura Comparada. Barcelona, Ed. Crнtica, 1985. GUYARD, M.-F., La Littйrature Comparйe. Paris, PUF, 1978. JEUNE, S., Littйrature gйnйrale et Littйrature Comparйe. Paris, Minard, 1968. JOST, F., Introduction to Comparative Literature. Indianapolis, Bobs Merrill, 1974. MARINO, A., Comparatisme et thйorie de la littйrature. Paris, PUF, 1988. PAGEAUX, D.-H., Lґimage culturelle. De la littйrature comparйe а lґanthropologie culturelle en Synthesis X, 1983, pp. 79-88. PRAWER, S. S., Comparative Literature Studies, An Introduction. London, Duckworth, 1973. RICO, F., Literatura e historia de la literatura en Boletнn Informativo, Fundaciуn Juan March, 127, pp. 3- 16, 1983. SCHMELING, M., Teorнa y praxis de la literatura comparada. Barcelona-Caracas, Ed. Alfa, 1984. 149
Programas 2010/2011 STALLKNECHT, N. P. Y FRENZ, H., Comparative Literature: Method and Perspective. Carbondale, III, Southern Illinois U. P., 1961. STUDIES IN ANGLO-FRENCH CULTURAL RELATIONS. IMAGINING FRANCE. Basingstoke and Cdn, Macmillan, 1988. TRANSATLANTIC MIRRORS.ESSAYS IN FRANCO-AMERICAN RELATIONS. Edit. by Sidney D. Braun and Seymour Lainoff. Boston: Twayne Publ. 1978. TROUSSON, R., Le mythe de Promйthйe dans la littйrature europйenne. 2 vols. Ginebra, Droz, 1964. VAN TIEGHEM, P., La Littйrature Comparйe. Paris, Armand Colin, 1951. WEISSTEIN, U., Introducciуn a la Literatura Comparada. Madrid, Planeta, 1975. WELLEK, R., Discriminations. New Haven, Yale U. P., 1970. WELLEK, R., WARREN, A., Theory of Literature. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1956. ________ , Perspectivas de la Literatura Comparada en Boletнn Informativo del Seminario del Derecho Polнtico. Salamanca, 27, pp. 57-70, 1962. ________ , Un problиme de Littйrature Comparйe: les йtudes de thиmes. Paris, Lettres Modernes, 1965. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Carlos Villar Flor y MЄ. Jesъs Salinero Cascante 150
Programas 2010/2011
2053010
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2053010 ANБLISIS DEL DISCURSO EN INGLЙS
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura Op
Curso 2cl
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ Desde una perspectiva funcional, el curso persigue dos objetivos esenciales: A travйs de un mуdulo teуrico se pretende ofrecer al alumnado una visiуn general sobre los principales aspectos del Anбlisis del discurso. Por otro lado, el mуdulo aplicado busca aplicar los nuevos conocimientos al anбlisis de textos orales o escritos. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________
1.
Introduction: language functions; pragmatics, discourse and communication; discourse types.
2.
Structured content. Propositions, topics, macro-structures; super-structures.
3.
Conversation analysis: turn-taking; adjacency; discourse markers.
4.
Inferences in discourse. Perspectivization. Presupposition, implicature.
5.
Cohesion and coherence in discourse. Rhetorical structure.
6.
Discourse and cognition. Cognitive modeling and discourse processing.
__S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Examen al final del curso basado en los contenidos de la asignatura.
__B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ -Alba Juez, L. 2009. Perspectives on Discourse Analysis: Theory and Practice. Cambridge: Cambridge Scholars. - Beaugrande, R.A. de & W.U. Dressler. 1986. Introduction to Text Linguistics. London & New York: Longman. - Brown, G. & G. Yule. 1983. Discourse analysis. Cambridge: CUP. - Clark, U. 2007. Studying language : English in Action. Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan. -Otal, J. L. & F. Ruiz de Mendoza. 2007. Modeling thought in language use: at the crossroads between discourse, pragmatics, and cognition. Jezikoslovlje 2/8: 115 ­ 167. -Renkema, J. 2004. Discourse Studies. An Introductory Texbook. Amsterdam ; Philadelphia: John Benjamins. -Renkema, J. (ed.) 2009. Discourse, of Course : an Overview of Research in Discourse Studies. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. -Ruiz de Mendoza, F. & J. L. Otal. 2002. Metonymy, Grammar & Communication. Granada: Comares.
Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Francisco Josй Ruiz de Mendoza Ibбсez.
151
Programas 2010/2011
2053014
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2053014 CINE ANGLONORTEAMERICANO
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura Op
Curso 2cl
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ To offer the student a panorama of the main tendencies in film production and a range of some of the most relevant filmmakers in Great Britain and the United States of America, mainly after the Second World War. At the end of the course the student must be able to write and comment on British and American films from several perspectives. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ Introduction: a glossary of film terms. The shot in cinema: distance, angle, duration. Styles of lighting. The use of sound. Film texts. US film: -The beginning of film in the United States of America. -A brief history of American film after the war. -The concept of classical cinema. -Film noir. -Contemporary American film. British film: -British film after the war: horror films, black comedy and British humour. -Recent British film: social realism. Textual analysis of the following films: -John Ford: The Searchers (1956) -Jacques Tourneur: Out of the Past (1947) -Orson Welles: Touch of Evil (1958) -Alfred Hitchcock: Psycho (1960) -Steven Spielberg: Indiana Jones and the Kingdom of the Crystal Skull (2008) -Michael Moore: Bowling for Columbine (2002) -Alexander MacKendrick: The Ladykillers (1955) -Ken Loach: It's a Free World (2007) Some of the titles might have to be changed, depending on their availability on DVD. After the introductory unit, the course will follow the rhythm of the films to be analysed. The films will be seen on a fortnightly basis. Depending on the way the group works, students might have to watch Out of the Past and The Ladykillers on their own. The more theoretical and historical parts of the course will be studied taking into consideration the films seen hitherto, and preparing the ground for the films to come, as well as making connections with other fields of knowledge.
152
Programas 2010/2011 __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ · A 2,500-word essay on one film --preferably directed by one of the directors whose films have been shown in class-- which must include an analysis on film history, or film language, or film technique, etc, related to the film or films studied, and focusing on a single topic. THIS TOPIC AND THE STRUCTURE OF THE ESSAY WILL HAVE TO BE AGREED ON WITH THE TEACHER DURING TUTORIAL HOURS. The essay must be sent to the teacher by means of the WebCT platform (Aula Virtual). Submission date: two weeks before that of the final examination. Late submission implies accepting the essay and the reviews/film identification exam (see below) as the only means of assessment. Only in June, the essay may be re-written, but the re-written version will only be considered for the July examination (see note below), and the June mark will be "NO PRESENTADO". There is yet the possibility of, instead of handing in the above mentioned essay, creating a short film in English which would be directed by the one of the students and produced and supervised by the teacher, if both a great majority of students and the teacher agree on this point and there are enough people to carry out this task. The rest of students might keep on with their essay writing (60 %). · Students can choose between (31%): a) Writing an original review of each film shown in class (which must be e-mailed to the teacher via WebCT before the subsequent film is shown in class) --ALL FILMS MUST BE REVIEWED and the marking will be as follows: 1) For the first three films, the mark will depend on when the review is handed in: handing each of them in time will mean 0.2 points (out of 10 in the final mark); late submission (after the day we see the subsequent film) will mean 0.1 points, and no submission just 0.0. 2) As for the last five reviews, each of them will amount to a maximum of 0.5 points: in case of late submission, the mark wil be reduced in -0.3 points (there will be no negative scoring anyways, and no submission will mean the same as for the first three reviews). The deadline for the last review will be two days before the end of classes. All the reviews must include a small picture taken FROM the film by the student (not from the Internet or any other source: instructions will be given on how to carry out this task). b) Sitting for an exam in which they will have to identify, contextualise and comment on fragments of several of the films shown in class, and which will take place on the last day of class. · Students will also write an original one-page review on a film to be determined by the teacher which hopefully will be shown at a Logroсo cinema house. This review must be shared with the rest of students and the teacher on a specific WebCT discussion group and sent to the Internet Movie Database as a user comment (instructions will be given on this point). Submission date: one week after the screening of the film. Late submission or not sending the review both ways will mean no scoring for this task (9 %). · An optional examination at the end of the course for those students who wish to have a better qualification (provided they have opted for the making of a short film, or the handing in of their long essay two weeks before the examination date) or for those who have not opted for any of the above mentioned assessment choices. The exam will consist of two parts: In the theoretical part it will be possible to choose between two points of the syllabus. The practical one will involve the analysis of a sequence taken from a film watched in class. One fragment from two different films will be shown in order to have the possibility to choose (100 %). NB: all individual marks will be kept for the July examination, but the long essay can only be re-written from June to July. There will be no re-writing of long essays for those who hand them in only in July (i.e., those who have not handed in any long essay for the June exam). VERY IMPORTANT NOTE: any case of plagiarism will mean a fail (SUSPENSO, 0.00) in the final mark of the subject, EVEN if the student does not complete all the different parts of the subject. Plagiarism may be detected even after marks have been finally awarded, in which case the final mark will also be changed to FAIL. 153
Programas 2010/2011 __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Aumont, J., Bergala, A. Marie, M. & Vernet, M. 1992. Aesthetics of Film. Austin: University of Texas Press. Bordwell, D. 1991 (1989). Making Meaning: Inference and Rhetoric in the Interpretation of Cinema. Cambridge (Massachusetts) & London: Harvard University Press. Bordwell, D. 1997 (1985). Narration in the Fiction Film. London & New York: Routledge. Branigan, E. 1992. Narrative Comprehension and Film. London and New York: Routledge. Casetti, Francesco y di Chio, Federico. 1998. Cуmo analizar un film. Barcelona: Paidуs [originally published in Italian in 1990. Analisi del film. Milбn: Gruppo Editoriale Fabbri. Translation by Carlos Losilla]. Dick, B.F. 1998. Anatomy of Film. (Third edition). New York: St. Martin's Press. Goldstein, L. & Konigsberg, I. (eds.) 1996. The Movies: Texts, Receptions, Exposures. Michigan: The University of Michigan Press. Gonzбlez Requena, Jesъs (comp.). 1995. El anбlisis cinematogrбfico. Madrid: Editorial Complutense. Hill, J. & Gibson, P. Ch. (eds.). 1998. The Oxford Guide to Film Studies. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Martнnez Torres, Augusto. 1996. Diccionario Espasa de Cine. Madrid: Espasa. Microsoft. 1997. Cinemania 97. (CD-ROM). Nelmes, J. 1996. An Introduction to Film Studies. London & New York: Routledge. Parkinson, D. 1995. History of Film. London and New York: Thames and Hudson. Porter, Miquel y Gonzбlez, Palmira. 1988. Las claves del cine. Barcelona: Ariel. Wollen, Peter. 1972. Signs and Meaning in the Cinema. Bloomington: Indiana University Press. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Josй Dнaz-Cuesta Galiбn 154
Programas 2010/2011
2053015
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2053015 HISTORIA DE LA LENGUA FRANCESA
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Inglesa
Tipo de Asignatura Op
Curso 2cl
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ Introducir al alumno en el conocimiento detallado de una etapa de especial importancia en la historia de la lengua inglesa, constituida por la presencia anglonormanda y francesa a lo largo de mбs de tres siglos (XI- XIV) en tierras inglesas. Mostrar la considerable influencia lingьнstica que dicha presencia tuvo sobre la lengua inglesa. Ofrecer una visiуn somera de la producciуn literaria en lengua francesa desarrollada en Inglaterra en la йpoca medieval. Dar a conocer brevemente la influencia del francйs sobre el inglйs en йpocas posteriores a la Edad Media. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ Programa teуrico: 1. Introducciуn histуrica: 2. La presencia normanda y Plantagenet en Inglaterra: a) La invasiуn y ocupaciуn. b) El uso del francйs entre 1066 y 1204. c) El uso del francйs en el siglo XIII. 3. Influencia del francйs antiguo sobre el inglйs medio: a) Lйxico. b) Sintaxis. 4. El declive del francйs en la Inglaterra medieval. 5. Literatura inglesa medieval escrita en francйs. 6. Influencia del francйs sobre el inglйs despuйs de la Edad Media. Prбcticas de aula: iniciaciуn del alumno, por medio de textos medievales, en el conocimiento e identificaciуn de tйrminos y expresiones inglesas de origen anglonormando y francйs. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ - Seguimiento continuado de los alumnos asistentes al curso. - Realizaciуn de un examen en el mes de febrero que comprenderб los siguientes apartados: Teуrico: desarrollo y explicaciуn de algunas de las cuestiones teуricas tratadas a lo largo del cuatrimestre. Prбctico: identificaciуn del origen francйs o anglonormando de diversas palabras de la lengua inglesa. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ IGLESIAS RБBADE, Luis: El uso del inglйs y francйs en la Inglaterra normanda y Plantagenet. Universidad de Santiago de Compostela: Servicio de publicaciones. 1992. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Ignacio Iсarrea Las Heras.
155
Programas 2010/2011
206 Licenciado en Humanidades
157
Programas 2010/2011
2061009
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2061009 LENGUA FRANCESA I
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Humanidades
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 1
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ - Consolidaciуn de las competencias definidas en el nivel A2 de comunicaciуn dentro del Marco comъn de referencia para el aprendizaje de lenguas extranjeras. - Adquisiciуn de conocimientos gramaticales, comunicativos y culturales necesarios que posibiliten ciertas competencias del nivel B1. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ Unidades 1 a 6 del mйtodo Connexions Niveau 2. En el programa de trabajo se incluyen tambiйn los ejercicios del Cahier d'exercices correspondientes a las unidades citadas. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ La evaluaciуn final tratarб de valorar las cuatro destrezas bбsicas y consistirб en - una prueba de comprensiуn oral a partir de un texto. - una prueba de expresiуn oral a partir de un tema de los relacionados en las unidades del programa. - una prueba escrita de comprensiуn y expresiуn partiendo igualmente de un texto incluido en el mйtodo. El alumno tendrб que responder a varias preguntas relacionadas con la comprensiуn textual, gramatical y cultural del texto y deberб ademбs hacer un ejercicio de redacciуn de unas 100 palabras aproximadamente. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Connexions Niveau 2, mйthode de franзais et Cahier d'exercices. Ed. Didier. Callamand, M., Grammaire vivante du franзais, Ed. Larousse. Paris, 1987. Dictionnaire Moderne Franзais-Espagnol, Espagnol-Franзais, Larousse, 1992. Le Nouveau Bescherelle, L'art de conjuguer, Sgel. Le Nouveau Bescherelle, L'art de l'ortographe, Sgel. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ. Josй Bonachнa Caballero .
159
Programas 2010/2011
2061011
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2061011 HISTORIA DE LA LITERATURA FRANCESA
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Humanidades
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 1
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ Se pretende introducir al alumno en las principales tendencias, movimientos y autores de la Literatura Francesa. El curso de Literatura Francesa consta de dos partes: una teуrica (programa teуrico) y otra prбctica (lecturas y comentarios). La lectura se efectuarб sobre un conjunto de obras literarias correspondientes a los autores estudiados. Dada su importancia, su lectura es obligatoria para presentarse al examen final. El comentario de textos versarб sobre un extracto de uno de los libros de lectura. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ Edad Media 1. La lнrica cortйs: Gйneros. Trovadores. FinґAmors. Tйcnica poйtica. 2. La narrativa cortesana: Caracterнsticas. Bйroul y Thomas: Tristбn e Iseo. Chrйtien de Troyes: El Caballero de la Carreta. Renacimiento- Siglo XVIII 3. Franзois Rabelais: Gargantua y Pantagruel. 4. El siglo de las luces. La novela y el cuento filosуfico: Voltaire: Cбndido. La novela epistolar: Laclos: Las amistades peligrosas. Siglo XIX 5. El Realismo: presupuestos teуricos. Flaubert: Madame Bovary. __L_E__C__T_U__R_A__Y__C__O__M__E_N__T_A__R_I_O__L__IT__E_R__A_R__I_O________________________________________________________ 1. Tristan e Iseo. (trad. en Alianza o Cбtedra). 2. Chrйtien de Troyes: Le chevalier de la charrette en Les romans de la Table Ronde. Folio. (Trad. El caballero de la carreta. Ed. de Luis Alberto de Cuenca y Carlos Garcнa Gual). Alianza.32. 3. Rabelais: Gargantua Folio. (Trad. esp. Alianza y Taurus). 4. Voltaire: Candide en Romans et Contes. Garnier-Flammarion. (Trad. Esp. Cбndido. Micromegas. Zadig (ed. de Elena Diego). Cбtedra. Tambiйn Cбndido en Alianza. 5. Flaubert: Madame Bovary. Gallimard, "Folio". (Trad. esp. de Mario Vargas Llosa. Taurus o de Consuelo Berges. Cбtedra). __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Examen final que constarб de una parte teуrica (preguntas del temario) y una parte prбctica (comentario literario sobre un texto correspondiente a una de las lecturas del curso). La parte teуrica computarб el 60 %, mientras que la prбctica el 40% del total del examen. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ AA. VV.: Introduction a la vie littйraire de... (6 vols.) Paris. Bordas. 1.968-1970. AA. VV.: Narrativa francesa del siglo XVIII. Madrid, UNED, 1988. ABRAHAM, P. y DESNE R. (dirs.): Histoire Littйraire de la France (7 vols.). Eds. Sociales. 1965-82. BAJTIN, M.: La cultura popular en la Edad Media y en el Renacimiento . Barcelona. Barral. 1.974. CAXTEX, P. G.: Micromйgas, Candide, LIngenu de Voltaire. Paris. CDU/SEDES, 1977. COHEN, G.: La vida literaria en la Edad Media . Madrid. F.C.E. 1.983.
160
Programas 2010/2011 ESPINA, A.: Voltaire y el siglo XVIII. Madrid, Jъcar, 1974. GARCIA GUAL, C.: Primeras novelas europeas. Barcelona, Itsmo. Historia de la Literatura Francesa. Cбtedra. LAGARDE, A. y MICHARD, L.: La littйrature franзaise (5 vols.). Paris. Bordas-Laffont. 1970-2. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ. Jesъs Salinero Cascante 161
Programas 2010/2011
2061026
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2061026 LENGUA INGLESA I
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Humanidades
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 1
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
OBJETIVOS ______________________________________________________________________________________________ The main aim of this course is to provide the student with comprehensive linguistic skills in speaking, listening, reading and writing at an intermediate level. The course will accordingly include activities which foster grammatical development, and vocabulary building. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ The Course Will Be Based On The New First Certificate Gold Course Book By Newbrook, Wilson And Acklam (Ed. Longman). (Units 1 to 5 included) This Includes Work On The Following Areas: Composition, Reading Comprehension, Use Of English, and Listening Comprehension. Although Comprehensive Coverage Of The English Grammar Is Provided By The Course Book, The Students Are Expected To Do Supplementary Work On Their Own With The Help Of The Recommended Bibliography Below. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ The Skills Examined At The End Of The Course Will Include: Use Of English, Vocabulary, Listening And Reading Comprehension (The Pass Mark Will Be 50% Of The Total). __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ - New First Certificate Gold Course Book By Newbrook, Wilson And Acklam (Ed. Longman) - A University Grammar Of English By Quirk And Greenbaum. (Ed. Longman) - Diccionario Bilingьe Collins Universal Espaсol ­ Inglйs; Inglйs ­ Espaсol. - Practical English Grammar By Thompson And Martinet. 1985
Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Concha Бlvaro Rojo e Ignacio Mendaza Enrique.
162
Programas 2010/2011
2061027
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2061027 HISTORIA DE LA LITERATURA INGLESA
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Humanidades
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 1
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ Principales autores y tendencias de la literatura de las Islas Britбnicas desde sus orнgenes hasta el siglo XX. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ 1. Introducciуn a la literatura inglesa: principales йpocas, movimientos y autores. 2. Literatura Medieval Inglesa: 2.1. Introducciуn. 2.2. Los inicios: poesнa religiosa y elegiaca en inglйs antiguo. "Caedmon's Hymn" "The Dream of the Rood", "The Wanderer". 2.3. De Guerrero a caballeros. Beowulf y Sir Gawain and the Green Knight 2.4. La transiciуn hacia el Renacimiento. Geoffrey Chaucer y los Canterbury Tales. "The Prologue", "The Knight's Tale", "The Miller's Tale", "The Wife of Bath's Tale". 2.5. El declive de la corte artъrica: Malory y La Morte D'Arthur. 3. Renacimiento. Poesнa y Teatro Isabelino. 3.1. El amor idealizado: Sonetos 3.2. Shakespeare y la escenografнa isabelina: comedias, dramas histуricos, tragedias. Romeo and Juliet; Much Ado About Nothing. 4. Panorama de los siglos XVII y XVIII. Los comienzos de la novela moderna. 4.1. Siglo XVII. John Donne, Ben Jonson y John Milton. 4.2. La sбtira. Jonathan Swift. Gulliver's Travels 4.3. Los comienzos de la novela moderna. Defoe, Fielding y Richardson. Robinson Crusoe. 5. El Romanticismo en poesнa y prosa. 5.1. Poesнa romбntica. 5.2. La novela romбntica. Wuthering Heights. 6. Siglo XIX. De la novela victoriana al esteticismo de fin de siglo. 6.1. Panorama de la novela victoriana: Dickens, George Eliot, Thomas Hardy. Great Expectations 6.2. El esteticismo de fin de siglo. Oscar Wilde. The Importance of Being Earnest. 7. Siglo XX. Modernismo, postmodernismo y mбs 7.1. El modernismo britбnico. Precursores y cultivadores. Henry James, Joseph Conrad. Virginia Woolf, James Joyce. Los muertos, de Dubliners. 7.2. Autores de entreguerras. Evelyn Waugh, George Orwell, Graham Greene. Brideshead Revisited 7.3. La novela inglesa desde la segunda guerra mundial. PROGRAMA DE PRБCTICAS EN LABORATORIO Y CAMPO: No habrб.
163
Programas 2010/2011 __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Examen final de carбcter teуrico-prбctico. ___B___I_B___L___I_O__G__R___A___F___Н_A___B__Б__S___I_C___A_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Lecturas obligatorias: Sir Gawain and the Green Knight William Shakespeare: Romeo and Juliet Daniel Defoe: Robinson Crusoe Charlotte Brontл: Wuthering Heights (Cumbres borrascosas) Charles Dickens: Great Expectations (Grandes Esperanzas) Oscar Wilde: The Importance of Being Earnest (La importancia de llamarse Ernesto) James Joyce: The Dead (Los muertos), del libro de relatos Dubliners (Dublineses) Evelyn Waugh: Brideshead Revisited (Retorno a Brideshead) Villalba, Estefanнa (1999) Claves para interpretar la literatura inglesa, Madrid: Alianza. Bibliografнa bбsica: ALVAREZ AMORУS, Josй Antonio ed. (1998) Historia crнtica de la novela inglesa, Salamanca: Almar. BARNARD, Robert (1994) A Short History of English Literature, Oxford. CARTER, Ronald & McRAE, John (1997) The Routledge History of Literature in English. Britain and Ireland, London: Routledge. DAICHIES, D. (1960: 1968) A Critical History of English Literature, 4 vols. London: Secker & Warburg. DIETZ, Bernd ed. (1989) Estudios literarios ingleses. La Restauraciуn (1660-1700), Madrid: Catedra. HIDALGO, Pilar & Alcaraz, Enrique (1992) La literatura inglesa en los textos, Alcoy: Marfil. IAСEZ PAREJA, Eduardo (1989-1993) Historia de la literatura, 9 vols., Barcelona: Tesys/ Bosch. ONEGA, Susana ed. (1986) Estudios literarios ingleses. Renacimiento y Barroco, Madrid: Catedra. PЙREZ MINIK, Domingo (1972) Introducciуn a la novela inglesa actual, Madrid: Guadarrama. PORTILLO, Rafael ed. (1987) Estudios literarios ingleses: Shakespeare y el teatro de su йpoca, Madrid: Cбtedra. PRAZ, Mario (1976) La literatura inglesa: del Romanticismo al siglo XX, Buenos Aires: Losada. PUJALS, Esteban (1984) Historia de la Literatura inglesa, Madrid: Gredos. REES, R.J. (1973) English Literature. An Introduction for Foreign Readers, London: MacMillan. SAMPSON, G. (1941: 1979) The Concise Cambridge History of English Literature, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. SANDERS, Andrew (1994) The Short Oxford History of English Literature O.U.P. WILLIAMS, Raymond Leslie (1997) Solos en la ciudad: La novela inglesa de Dickens a D.H. Lawrence, Madrid: Debate. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Cristina Flores Moreno 164
Programas 2010/2011
2062013
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2062013 LENGUA FRANCESA II
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Humanidades
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 1
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ El objetivo principal de la asignatura Lengua Francesa II es la adquisiciуn de una competencia comunicativa que permita al alumno desenvolverse en diferentes situaciones de comunicaciуn en el marco de la vida cotidiana; los conocimientos y las competencias adquiridas corresponden al nivel B1 __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ Los contenidos comunicativos, lingьнsticos y socioculturales se articulan alrededor de cuatro temas que corresponden a las unidades 1-4 de Alter Ego , Mйthode de Franзais B1 . __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Examen final, que constarб de una prueba escrita de 2 horas y una prueba oral de unos 10 minutos. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ -Dollez, Catherine et Sylvie Pons. 2007. Alter ego Mйthode de franзais B1. Hachette (FLE). - Gregoire, Maпa .2003. Grammaire Progressive du Franзais. Niveau Intermйdiare. Clй International. -Larousse Gran diccionario Espaсol- Francйs/Francйs- Espaсol. -Robert, Paul. 1971. Micro-Robert dictionnaire du franзais primordial. Parнs: S.N.L. Le Robert. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ. Бngeles Moreno Lara
165
Programas 2010/2011
2062017
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2062017 LENGUA INGLESA II
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Humanidades
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 1
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ The aim of this course is to provide the student with comprehensive competence in listening, speaking, reading, and writing. At the end of this course the students should have attained the level required to pass the Cambridge First Certificate in English.. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ The theoretical approach will be based on units 7-14 of the book New First Certificate Gold Coursebook (London: Longman, 2004) by Newbrook, Jacky, Judith Wilson & Richard Acklam. With respect to the following skills, students will have to meet the Cambridge First Certificate standards in: fluency, grammatical accuracy, pronunciation, interactive communication and vocabulary resource. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Final Exam: The skills that will be examined at the end of the course will include: use of English, vocabulary, composition, reading and listening comprehension (50%); and oral interview (50%). The oral interview will be assessed according to fluency, pronunciation, grammar in use, and intonation criteria. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Newbrook, J. , Wilson, J. & Acklam, R. (2004) New First Certificate Gold Coursebook. London: Longman. (Units 7-14). BIBLIOGRAFНA COMPLEMENTARIA: - Eastwood, J. (1992): Oxford Practice Grammar, Oxford: Oxford University Press. - Campos, M. A., A. Lillo & V. M. Pina. (2000): Grammar in Gobbets. Alicante: Aguaclara. - Hewings, M. (1999): Advanced Grammar in Use. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. - Leech G. (1989): An A-Z of English Grammar & Usage. London: Arnold. ______ & J. Svartvik (1975): A Communicative Grammar of English. London: Longman. - Murphy, R. (1994): English Grammar in Use, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. - Promodou, Luke (2002) Grammar and Vocabulary for First Certificate. Harlow: Pearson. - Quirk, R. & S. Greenbaum (1973): A University Grammar in Use. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. - Swan, M. (1995): Practical English Usage, Oxford: Oxford University Press. - Thomson, A.J. & Martinet, A.V. (1989): A Practical English Grammar, Oxford: Oxford University Press. - Vince, M. (1996) First Certificate Language Practice, Oxford; MacMillan. - Watcyn-Jones, P. and Allsop, J. (2002) Test your Grammar and Usage for FCE. Harlow: Pearson Education. - Wyatt, Rawdon (2002) Test your Vocabulary for FCE. Harlow: Pearson Education. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Cristina Flores Moreno
166
Programas 2010/2011 207 Licenciado en Administraciуn y Direcciуn de Empresas 167
Programas 2010/2011
2073010
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2073010 FRANCЙS EMPRESARIAL I
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Administraciуn y Direcciуn de Empresas
Tipo de Asignatura Op
Curso 2cl
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3,
Prбcticos Aula 1,5
Prбcticos Laboratorio 1,5
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ El objetivo principal de la asignatura es la adquisiciуn de una competencia comunicativa que permita al alumno desenvolverse en diferentes situaciones de comunicaciуn en el marco de la vida profesional y validar, en el curso o al final de su aprendizaje, sus conocimientos adquiridos por un certificado de francйs profesional (CFP); particularmente pretendemos el desarrollo de las competencias siguientes: 1 Generales: Trabajo en equipo. autoevaluaciуn. conocimiento de otras culturas y costumbres en el mundo cotidiano y en el de la empresa. Manejo de recursos de internet: bъsqueda de informaciуn, 2 Especнficas: - Comprender lo esencial de un mensaje previsible (contexto, aspectos esenciales) de una comunicaciуn cara a cara, o telefуnica, dentro de un бmbito personal y/o profesional. - Comprender el sentido general y los elementos esenciales de artнculos de prensa sencillos y de documentos de comunicaciуn de la empresa normales (horarios, cartas, fax, e-mails, notas e informes), asн como otros mбs comunes (publicitarios, informativos, turнsticos). - Establecer contactos sociales, describir su profesiуn, su actividad, ejercitarse en conversaciones telefуnicas: solicitar informaciуn , reservar servicios, quedar con amigos, con colegas de trabajo, intercambiar informaciones, expresar su opiniуn decir sus preferencias en situaciones concretas y sobre temas conocidos. - Redactar textos cortos y sencillos en relaciуn con una actividad social o profesional. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ El programa consta de seis unidades didбcticas con contenidos comunicativos y competenciales relativos a algunos aspectos del mundo profesional y de la empresa: 1.-Presentaciуn personal y presentaciуn de la empresa: Saludar, dar las gracias, felicitar, despedirse. hablar de su trabajo, de su experiencia, de sus proyectos profesionales. 2.- El marco o entorno profesional: bъsqueda de un empleo de unas prбcticas de empresa, primeras entrevistas de trabajo. 3.-Bъsqueda de un apartamento: el banco, el dinero. 4.-Viajar por negocios: Describir una ciudad, un hotel , aeropuertos y estaciones 5.- Las relaciones fuera de trabajo: lugares de encuentro, de visita, organizar una comida de negocios. 6.-.Conocer, describir una empresa. Prбcticas de aula Actividades individuales y de grupo que suponen el desarrollo de tareas especнficas con objetivos de aprendizaje comunicativos, lingьнsticos e interculturales relativos a las situaciones de comunicaciуn de las unidades didбcticas. Escucha de documentos audio. Tareas sobre la comprensiуn y expresiуn orales y escritas. La comunicaciуn telefуnica: Recibir y transmitir mensajes sencillos por telйfono Leer y redactar un CV. Una carta de motivaciуn. Leer documentos relacionados con la empresa. Completar impresos y formularios. Tomar notas. Redactar mensajes cortos, notas, cartas sencillas. Visionado de documentos relativos al mundo de la empresa . Situaciones que permiten al alumno comparar y debatir aspectos relacionados con el comportamiento intercultural en el medio profesional. Estudios de caso.
169
Programas 2010/2011 __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__D__E__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__E__N__L_A__B_O__R__A_T__O__R_I_O__Y__C__A_M__P__O___________________________________ Tareas de Internet aplicadas a la Enseсanza de Lenguas: - Ejercicios tradicionales - Actividades de Simulaciуn - Bъsquedas y navegaciones Dichas actividades pueden realizarse en presencia del docente en una clase de ordenadores o a distancia, en el Aula Virtual. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ La evaluaciуn se apoya en los criterios siguientes: 1 Autoevaluaciуn. los libros de referencia, de texto, asн como algunos documentos electrуnicos ofrecen actividades y sus correcciones. el alumno puede recurrir al profesor en horario de tutorнas presenciales y /o virtuales. 2. Evaluaciуn continua. en este apartado se evaluarб: 2.1 - La asistencia y participaciуn activa del alumno en clase y su implicaciуn en las actividades individuales y de grupo. Su valoraciуn es de un 15% de la nota final. 2.2. - La realizaciуn y entrega de trabajos individuales y/o de grupo junto con las tareas del Aula Virtual. En este apartado figuran ejercicios escritos y exposiciones orales. Se tendrб en cuenta la calidad del trabajo. Su valoraciуn es de un 15%. 3 - Examen final. Esta prueba constarб de unos ejercicios escritos y de una exposiciуn oral de unos 8 minutos. Su valor es de un 70% de la nota. - Prueba escrita sobre contenidos que han conformado los objetivos de aprendizaje. - Expresiуn escrita: redacciуn de un texto relacionado con las situaciones de comunicaciуn del programa. - Comprensiуn oral: escucha de un documento relacionado con las situaciones de comunicaciуn del programa y ejercicio de respuestas a preguntas sobre el mismo. -Expresiуn oral: Diбlogo en interacciуn con el profesor y simulaciуn de una situaciуn de la vida social o profesional relativa al programa tambiйn en interacciуn . __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A_________________________________________________________________________________ Corado, L. 2004. @ffaires 1. SGEL Guillmann, B. 2007. Travailler en franзais en entreprise. HachetteGruneberg, A. y Tauzen, B. 2000. Comment vont les affaires. Paris. Hachette. Penfornis, J. L. 2003. Franзais com. Paris Clй International Grйgoire, M. et Thiйvenaz, O. 1995. Grammaire progressive du franзais Parнs. Clй International Robert, P :1999. Micro-Robert dictionnaire du franзais primordial. Parнs: S.N.L.Le Robert. Garcнa -Pelayo y Gross, Ramуn. 1999. Gran Diccionario espaсol-francйs/francйs-espaсol. Barcelona: Larousse. Documents electroniques: pages d'Internet Documents йcrits: articles de presse, publicitйs, Documents vidйo: La voyagerie Vivez les affaires Extraits de films Profesor/Profesores responsables: MЄ. Бngeles Moreno Lara 170
Programas 2010/2011
2073011
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2073011 INGLЙS EMPRESARIAL I
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Administraciуn y Direcciуn de Empresas
Tipo de Asignatura Op
Curso 2cl
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula
Prбcticos Laboratorio 3
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ Los principales objetivos de esta habilidad curricular, que se imparte siguiendo el modelo-mixto de enseсanza (3 crйditos de enseсanza presencial y 3 crйditos de enseсanza virtual) y que va dirigida a personas con unos conocimientos de la lengua inglesa a un nivel intermedio-bajo, son consolidar los recursos lйxicos, gramaticales y discursivos de la lengua inglesa y profundizar en otros nuevos con el fin de comunicarse formalmente en el entorno de la empresa. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ En esta asignatura se propicia un aprendizaje autуnomo y ligado a la propia experiencia del estudiante. El carбcter teуrico-prбctico de la enseсanza presencial de la asignatura en el aula y en las prбcticas de laboratorio de idiomas lleva consigo una continua combinaciуn de explicaciones teуricas y ejercicios y actividades prбcticas para favorecer su asimilaciуn. La enseсanza virtual complementa el estudio de las caracterнsticas genйricas del inglйs empresarial que se lleva a cabo en la parte presencial. A) Contenidos de la docencia presencial: Companies, Leadership, Strategy, Pay, Development, Marketing,,Outsourcing and Finance. B) Contenidos de la docencia virtual: Globalisation, Brands, Travel, Advertising, Money and Change __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__D__E__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__E__N__L_A__B_O__R__A_T__O__R_I_O__Y__C__A_M__P__O___________________________________ Las prбcticas de laboratorio, bien en el Edificio Quintiliano, bien en el Aula 101 del Edificio Filologнas (Sala de Audiovisuales), tienen el mismo carбcter. En dichas prбcticas se intentarбn reforzar las destrezas de comprensiуn y expresiуn oral. Por todo ello, las actividades que se realizarбn durante estas sesiones serбn las siguientes: audiciones, visionado de pelнculas de informaciуn empresarial o similares a las descritas en los textos utilizados en las clases presenciales, debates y discusiones acerca de temas empresariales, exposiciones orales por parte de los alumnos sobre los temas estudiados en el programa, exposiciones orales acerca de situaciones especнficas del бmbito empresarial, ejercicios de role-playing en los que los alumnos deberбn representar distintos papeles relacionados con el mundo de la empresa ante posibles problemas expuestos asн como otras actividades propias de la asignatura. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ La evaluaciуn final de la asignatura serб un compendio de todas aquellas actividades que se hayan realizado a lo largo del curso acadйmico. Asн se valorarб: 1) La participaciуn activa de los alumnos en las actividades realizadas en las clases; 2) La asistencia a las prбcticas de laboratorio y la realizaciуn de las actividades asignadas cada dнa (El examen final escrito tendrб un ejercicio de comprensiуn auditiva basado en los textos utilizados en las prбcticas de laboratorio); 3) La entrega a tiempo de las actividades on-line (Consultar el calendario en el aula virtual) Los ejercicios on-line estбn secuenciados en unidades y cada unidad comprende una serie de ejercicios que serбn activados temporalmente en el aula virtual. Los alumnos deberбn obtener la puntuaciуn mбxima en cada una de ellos. Aquellos estudiantes que no realicen las actividades on-line no podrбn presentarse al examen escrito. La realizaciуn de dichas actividades puntъan (2 puntos) 4) La realizaciуn del examen presencial escrito al final del cuatrimestre. Dicho examen constarб de ejercicios prбcticos similares a los realizados durante el curso tanto en la parte presencial como virtual, es decir, comprensiуn de un texto, ejercicio de comprensiуn auditiva, ejercicios de
171
Programas 2010/2011 gramбtica, vocabulario, uso del inglйs, traducciуn de una carta comercial, ... etc. del tipo respuesta mъltiple, rellenar huecos, matching, detenciуn y correcciуn de errores... etc. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Libros de texto: Clarke, Simon. (2009): In Company pre-intermediate Student's Book, second edition, Oxford: MacMillan Material complementario: Gramбtica: Eastwood, J. (1992): Oxford Practice Grammar, Oxford: Oxford University Press. Murphy, R. (1994): English Grammar in Use, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Swan, M. (1995): Practical English Usage, Oxford: Oxford University Press. Strutt, Peter. 2000. Market leader business grammar and usage. Essex: Longman. Vocabulario: Badger, Ian (2001): Business English phrases. London: Penguin. Badger, Ian (2005) English For Work: Everyday Business English. London: Longman. Evans, David (2000): Business English Verbs. London: Penguin. Eastment, David (2001): Business English Words. London: Penguin. Flinders, Steve (2002): Test Your Professional Business: General. London: Penguin. Redacciуn: Armitage Amato, Rachel (1994): Escribir cartas: Inglйs. Barcelona: Difusiуn. Badger, Ian and Sue Pedley (2005) English For Work: Everyday Business Writing. London: Longman. Freitag-Lawrence, Anne (2005) English For Work: Business Presentations. London: Longman. Sherman, Jane (1994): Feedback. Essential Writing Skills for Intermediate Students, Oxford: Oxford University Press. Lougheed, L. Business correspondence. New York and Philadelphia: Longman. Rosset, Edward R. (1995): Bilingual Business Letters. Cartas Comerciales Bilingьes. Irъn: Stanley. Trask, R. L. (2001): Mind the Gaffe: The Penguin Guide to Common Errors in English. London: Penguin. Diccionarios: a) Monolingьes: Collins COBUILD English Language Dictionary (1987), Collins. Longman Dictionary of Contemporary English (1978), Longman. Longman Dictionary of Business English (1978), Longman. Longman Language Activator (1993), Longman. LTP Dictionary of Selected Collocations (1997), LTP. Oxford Advanced Learner's Dictionary (1995), OUP. Oxford Dictionary of Business English (1995), OUP. b) Bilingьes: Diccionario Oxford inglйs-espaсol, espaсol-inglйs (1998), Oxford: OUP. Diccionario Oxford Business Espaсol-Inglйs Inglйs-Espaсol. 2002. Oxford: O.U.P. Diccionario moderno espaсol-inglйs/English-Spanish (1976), Larousse. The Collins English-Spanish/Spanish-English Dictionary (1989), Collins. Lozano, J.M. 2000. Diccionario Bilingьe de Economнa y Empresa. Madrid: Editorial Pirбmide. Miles, Andrew, 2000. Diccionario de Economнa y Empresa. Inglйs-Espaсol. Espaсol-Inglйs. Barcelona: Gestiуn. Collins. Cobuild. English Dictionary for Advanced Learners. 2001. Third Edition. Glasgow: HaperCollins Diccionario Espaсol-Inglйs. English-Spanish. 2000. Sexta Ediciуn. Glasgow: HarperCollins. Enlaces (prensa especializada en Inglйs Empresarial): http://www.msnbc.com/news/ http://www.time.com/time/ http://www.economist.com/ 172
Programas 2010/2011 http://www.timesonline.co.uk/ http://www.businessweek.com/smallbiz/ http://www.guardian.co.uk/business/ http://www.accountancymag.co.uk/ http://www.prnewswire.com/news/ Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Pedro Araъz Gуmez Cadiсanos y Concepciуn Бlvaro Rojo 173
Programas 2010/2011 209 Licenciado en Filologнa Hispбnica 175
Programas 2010/2011
2091004
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2091004 LENGUA FRANCESA I
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Hispбnica
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 1
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ - Consolidaciуn de las competencias definidas en el nivel A2 de comunicaciуn dentro del Marco comъn de referencia para el aprendizaje de lenguas extranjeras. - Adquisiciуn de conocimientos gramaticales, comunicativos y culturales necesarios que posibiliten ciertas competencias del nivel B1. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ Unidades 1 a 6 del mйtodo Connexions Niveau 2. En el programa de trabajo se incluyen tambiйn los ejercicios del Cahier d'exercices correspondientes a las unidades citadas. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ La evaluaciуn final tratarб de valorar las cuatro destrezas bбsicas y consistirб en - una prueba de comprensiуn oral a partir de un texto. - una prueba de expresiуn oral a partir de un tema de los relacionados en las unidades del programa. - una prueba escrita de comprensiуn y expresiуn partiendo igualmente de un texto incluido en el mйtodo. El alumno tendrб que responder a varias preguntas relacionadas con la comprensiуn textual, gramatical y cultural del texto y deberб ademбs hacer un ejercicio de redacciуn de unas 100 palabras aproximadamente. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Connexions Niveau 2, mйthode de franзais et Cahier d'exercices. Ed. Didier. Callamand, M., Grammaire vivante du franзais, Ed. Larousse. Paris, 1987. Dictionnaire Moderne Franзais-Espagnol, Espagnol-Franзais, Larousse, 1992. Le Nouveau Bescherelle, L'art de conjuguer, Sgel. Le Nouveau Bescherelle, L'art de l'ortographe, Sgel. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ. Josй Bonachнa Caballero .
177
Programas 2010/2011
2091005
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2091005 LENGUA INGLESA I
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Hispбnica
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 1
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ The main aim of this course is to provide the student with comprehensive linguistic skills in speaking, listening, reading and writing at an intermediate level. The course will accordingly include activities which foster grammatical development, vocabulary building and audio-oral practice. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ The course will be based on the new first certificate gold course book by Newbrook, Wilson and Acklam (ed. Longman). (units 1 to 5 included) This includes work on the following areas: composition, reading comprehension, use of English, and listening comprehension. Although comprehensive coverage of the English grammar is provided by the course book, the students are expected to do supplementary work on their own with the help of the recommended bibliography below. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ The skills examined at the end of the course will include: use of English, vocabulary, listening and reading comprehension (the pass mark will be 50% of the total). __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ New First Certificate Gold Course Book by Newbrook, Wilson and Acklam (Ed. Longman) A University Grammar of English by Quirk and Greenbaum. (Ed. Longman) Diccionario Bilingьe Collins Universal Espaсol ­ Inglйs; Inglйs ­ Espaсol. Practical English Grammar by Thompson and Martinet. 1985 Profesor/Profesores responsables: Concepciуn Бlvaro Rojo e Ignacio Mensaza Enrique..
178
Programas 2010/2011
2091006
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2091006 HISTORIA DE LA LITERATURA FRANCESA
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Hispбnica
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 1
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ Se pretende introducir al alumno en las principales tendencias, movimientos y autores de la Literatura Francesa. El curso de Literatura Francesa consta de dos partes: una teуrica (programa teуrico) y otra prбctica (lecturas y comentarios). La lectura se efectuarб sobre un conjunto de obras literarias correspondientes a los autores estudiados. Dada su importancia, su lectura es obligatoria para presentarse al examen final. El comentario de textos versarб sobre un extracto de uno de los libros de lectura. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ Edad Media 1. La lнrica cortйs: Gйneros. Trovadores. FinґAmors. Tйcnica poйtica. 2. La narrativa cortesana: Caracterнsticas. Bйroul y Thomas: Tristбn e Iseo. Chrйtien de Troyes: El Caballero de la Carreta. Renacimiento- Siglo XVIII 3. Franзois Rabelais: Gargantua y Pantagruel. 4. El siglo de las luces. La novela y el cuento filosуfico: Voltaire: Cбndido. La novela epistolar: Laclos: Las amistades peligrosas. Siglo XIX 5 El Realismo: presupuestos teуricos. Flaubert: Madame Bovary. __L_E__C__T_U__R_A__Y__C__O__M__E_N__T_A__R_I_O__L__IT__E_R__A_R__I_O________________________________________________________ 1. Tristan e Iseo. (trad. en Alianza o Cбtedra). 2. Chrйtien de Troyes: Le chevalier de la charrette en Les romans de la Table Ronde. Folio. (Trad. El caballero de la carreta. Ed. de Luis Alberto de Cuenca y Carlos Garcнa Gual). Alianza.32. 3. Rabelais: Gargantua Folio. (Trad. esp. Alianza y Taurus). 4. Voltaire: Candide en Romans et Contes. Garnier-Flammarion. (Trad. Esp. Cбndido. Micromegas. Zadig (ed. de Elena Diego). Cбtedra. Tambiйn Cбndido en Alianza. 5. Flaubert: Madame Bovary. Gallimard, "Folio". (Trad. esp. de Mario Vargas Llosa. Taurus o de Consuelo Berges. Cбtedra). __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Examen final que constarб de una parte teуrica (preguntas del temario) y una parte prбctica (comentario literario sobre un texto correspondiente a una de las lecturas del curso). La parte teуrica computarб el 60 %, mientras que la prбctica el 40% del total del examen. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ AA. VV.: Introduction a la vie littйraire de... (6 vols.) Paris. Bordas. 1.968-1970. AA. VV.: Narrativa francesa del siglo XVIII. Madrid, UNED, 1988. ABRAHAM, P. y DESNE R. (dirs.): Histoire Littйraire de la France (7 vols.). Eds. Sociales. 1965-82. BAJTIN, M.: La cultura popular en la Edad Media y en el Renacimiento . Barcelona. Barral. 1.974.
179
Programas 2010/2011 CAXTEX, P. G.: Micromйgas, Candide, LIngenu de Voltaire. Paris. CDU/SEDES, 1977. COHEN, G.: La vida literaria en la Edad Media . Madrid. F.C.E. 1.983. ESPINA, A.: Voltaire y el siglo XVIII. Madrid, Jъcar, 1974. GARCIA GUAL, C.: Primeras novelas europeas. Barcelona, Itsmo. Historia de la Literatura Francesa. Cбtedra. LAGARDE, A. y MICHARD, L.: La littйrature franзaise (5 vols.). Paris. Bordas-Laffont. 1970-2. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ. Jesъs Salinero Cascante 180
Programas 2010/2011
2091007
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2091007 HISTORIA DE LA LITERATURA INGLESA
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Hispбnica
Tipo de Asignatura T
Curso 1
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ Principales autores y tendencias de la literatura de las Islas Britбnicas desde sus orнgenes hasta el siglo XX. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ 1. Introducciуn a la literatura inglesa: principales йpocas, movimientos y autores. 2. Literatura Medieval Inglesa: 2.1. Introducciуn. 2.2. Los inicios: poesнa religiosa y elegiaca en inglйs antiguo. "Caedmon's Hymn" "The Dream of the Rood", "The Wanderer". 2.3. De guerreros a caballeros. Beowulf y Sir Gawain and the Green Knight 2.6. La transiciуn hacia el Renacimiento. Geoffrey Chaucer y los Canterbury Tales. "The Prologue", "The Knight's Tale", "The Miller's Tale", "The Wife of Bath's Tale". 2.7. El declive de la corte artъrica: Malory y La Morte D'Arthur. 3. Renacimiento. Poesнa y Teatro Isabelino. 3.1. El amor idealizado: Sonetos 3.2. Shakespeare y la escenografнa isabelina: comedias, dramas histуricos, tragedias. Romeo and Juliet; Much Ado About Nothing. 4. Panorama de los siglos XVII y XVIII. Los comienzos de la novela moderna. 4.1. Siglo XVII. John Donne, Ben Jonson y John Milton. 4.2. La sбtira. Jonathan Swift. Gulliver's Travels 4.3. Los comienzos de la novela moderna. Defoe, Fielding y Richardson. Robinson Crusoe. 5. El Romanticismo en poesнa y prosa. 5.1. Poesнa romбntica. 5.2. La novela romбntica. Wuthering Heights. 6. Siglo XIX. De la novela victoriana al esteticismo de fin de siglo. 6.3. Panorama de la novela victoriana: Dickens, George Eliot, Thomas Hardy. Great Expectations 6.4. El esteticismo de fin de siglo. Oscar Wilde. The Importance of Being Earnest. 7. Siglo XX. Modernismo, postmodernismo y mбs 7.1. El modernismo britбnico. Precursores y cultivadores. Henry James, Joseph Conrad. Virginia Woolf, James Joyce. Los muertos, de Dubliners. 7.2. Autores de entreguerras. Evelyn Waugh, George Orwell, Graham Greene. Brideshead Revisited 7.3. La novela inglesa desde la segunda guerra mundial. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Examen final de carбcter teуrico-prбctico. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Lecturas obligatorias: Sir Gawain and the Green Knight William Shakespeare: Romeo and Juliet Daniel Defoe: Robinson Crusoe
181
Programas 2010/2011 Charlotte Brontл: Wuthering Heights (Cumbres borrascosas) Charles Dickens: Great Expectations (Grandes Esperanzas) Oscar Wilde: The Importance of Being Earnest (La importancia de llamarse Ernesto) James Joyce: The Dead (Los muertos), del libro de relatos Dubliners (Dublineses) Evelyn Waugh: Brideshead Revisited (Retorno a Brideshead) VILLALBA, Estefanнa (1999) Claves para interpretar la literatura inglesa, Madrid: Alianza. Bibliografнa bбsica: ALVAREZ AMORУS, Josй Antonio ed. (1998) Historia crнtica de la novela inglesa, Salamanca: Almar. BARNARD, Robert (1994) A Short History of English Literature, Oxford. CARTER, Ronald & McRAE, John (1997) The Routledge History of Literature in English. Britain and Ireland, London: Routledge. DAICHIES, D. (1960: 1968) A Critical History of English Literature, 4 vols. London: Secker & Warburg. DIETZ, Bernd ed. (1989) Estudios literarios ingleses. La Restauraciуn (1660-1700), Madrid: Catedra. HIDALGO, Pilar & Alcaraz, Enrique (1992) La literatura inglesa en los textos, Alcoy: Marfil. IAСEZ PAREJA, Eduardo (1989-1993) Historia de la literatura, 9 vols., Barcelona: Tesys/ Bosch. ONEGA, Susana ed. (1986) Estudios literarios ingleses. Renacimiento y Barroco, Madrid: Catedra. PЙREZ MINIK, Domingo (1972) Introducciуn a la novela inglesa actual, Madrid: Guadarrama. PORTILLO, Rafael ed. (1987) Estudios literarios ingleses: Shakespeare y el teatro de su йpoca, Madrid: Cбtedra. PRAZ, Mario (1976) La literatura inglesa: del Romanticismo al siglo XX, Buenos Aires: Losada. PUJALS, Esteban (1984) Historia de la Literatura inglesa, Madrid: Gredos. REES, R.J. (1973) English Literature. An Introduction for Foreign Readers, London: MacMillan. SAMPSON, G. (1941: 1979) The Concise Cambridge History of English Literature, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. SANDERS, Andrew (1994) The Short Oxford History of English Literature O.U.P. WILLIAMS, Raymond Leslie (1997) Solos en la ciudad: La novela inglesa de Dickens a D.H. Lawrence, Madrid: Debate. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Cristina Flores Moreno. 182
Programas 2010/2011
2092003
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2092003 LENGUA FRANCESA II
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Hispбnica
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 1
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ El objetivo principal de la asignatura Lengua Francesa II es la adquisiciуn de una competencia comunicativa que permita al alumno desenvolverse en diferentes situaciones de comunicaciуn en el marco de la vida cotidiana; los conocimientos y las competencias adquiridas corresponden al nivel B1 __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ Los contenidos comunicativos, lingьнsticos y socioculturales se articulan alrededor de cuatro temas que corresponden a las unidades 1-4 de Alter Ego , Mйthode de Franзais B1 . __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Examen final que constarб de una prueba escrita de 2 horas y una prueba oral de unos 10 minutos. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ -Dollez, Catherine et Sylvie Pons. 2007. Alter ego Mйthode de franзais B1. Hachette (FLE). - Gregoire, Maпa .2003. Grammaire Progressive du Franзais. Niveau Intermйdiare. Clй International. -Larousse Gran diccionario Espaсol- Francйs/Francйs- Espaсol. -Robert, Paul. 1971. Micro-Robert dictionnaire du franзais primordial. Parнs: S.N.L. Le Robert. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: MЄ. Бngeles Moreno Lara.
183
Programas 2010/2011
2092004
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
2092004 LENGUA INGLESA II
Titulaciуn Licenciatura en Filologнa Hispбnica
Tipo de Asignatura O
Curso 1
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ The aim of this course is to provide the student with comprehensive competence in listening, speaking, reading, and writing. At the end of this course the students should have attained the level required to pass the Cambridge First Certificate in English. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ The theoretical approach will be based on units 7-14 of the book New First Certificate Gold Coursebook (London: Longman, 2004) by Newbrook, Jacky, Judith Wilson & Richard Acklam. With respect to the following skills, students will have to meet the Cambridge First Certificate standards in: fluency, grammatical accuracy, pronunciation, interactive communication and vocabulary resource. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Final Exam: The skills that will be examined at the end of the course will include: use of English, vocabulary, composition, reading and listening comprehension (50%); and oral interview (50%). The oral interview will be assessed according to fluency, pronunciation, grammar in use, and intonation criteria. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A_________________________________________________________________________________ Bibliografнa Bбsica: Newbrook, J. , Wilson, J. & Acklam, R. (2004) New First Certificate Gold Coursebook. London: Longman. (Units 7-14). Bibliografнa Complementaria: Eastwood, J. (1992): Oxford Practice Grammar, Oxford: Oxford University Press. Campos, M. A., A. Lillo & V. M. Pina. (2000): Grammar in Gobbets. Alicante: Aguaclara. Hewings, M. (1999): Advanced Grammar in Use. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Leech G. (1989): An A-Z of English Grammar & Usage. London: Arnold. ______ & J. Svartvik (1975): A Communicative Grammar of English. London: Longman. Murphy, R. (1994): English Grammar in Use, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Promodou, Luke (2002) Grammar and Vocabulary for First Certificate. Harlow: Pearson. Quirk, R. & S. Greenbaum (1973): A University Grammar in Use. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Swan, M. (1995): Practical English Usage, Oxford: Oxford University Press. Thomson, A.J. & Martinet, A.V. (1989): A Practical English Grammar, Oxford: Oxford University Press. Vince, M. (1996) First Certificate Language Practice, Oxford; MacMillan. Watcyn-Jones, P. and Allsop, J. (2002) Test your Grammar and Usage for FCE. Harlow: Pearson Education. Wyatt, Rawdon (2002) Test your Vocabulary for FCE. Harlow: Pearson Education. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: Cristina Flores Moreno ґ
184
Programas 2010/2011
888 Asignaturas de Libre elecciуn
185
Programas 2010/2011
8880037
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
8880037 INGLЙS JURНDICO I
Titulaciуn Libre elecciуn
Tipo de Asignatura Le
Curso
Cuatrimestre 1
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ El curso estб diseсado con el objetivo de dotar al estudiante de un nivel medio de conocimientos de las caracterнsticas gramaticales, semбnticas y lйxicas del inglйs jurнdico. Para conseguir este objetivo, a lo largo del curso se estudiarбn en detalle aquellas бreas de la gramбtica inglesa que son caracterнsticas de los textos y el discurso jurнdico, haciendo especial hincapiй en el vocabulario especнfico de este registro del inglйs. El objetivo final del curso es el de desarrollar las destrezas de expresiуn y comprensiуn escritas del estudiante de forma que quede capacitado para (1) entender textos legales especializados en lengua inglesa y (2) expresar sus conocimientos sobre temas jurнdicos. __P_R__O_G__R_A__M__A__T_E_У__R_I_C_O__Y__P_R_Б__C_T__IC__A_S__D_E__A__U_L_A_____________________________________________________ Lesson 1. General linguistic traits of legal English Lesson 2: Legal System: Law and codes Lesson 3: Legal Institutions I: Lawyers Lesson 4. Legal Institutions II: Courts Lesson 5: Public law: Criminal law Lesson 6: Private law: Civil law, contracts and insurance, family law, etc. Las clases presenciales se dedicarбn a exposiciуn de las caracterнsticas lingьнsticas del inglйs jurнdico, especialmente de sus caracterнsticas estilнsticas. La parte on-line de la asignatura se dedicarб fundamentalmente a la realizaciуn de ejercicios prбcticos de gramбtica y lйxico. __S_I_S_T_E_M__A__Y__C_R__IT__E_R_I_O__S_D__E_E__V_A__L_U_A__C_I_У__N__________________________________________________________ La prueba de evaluaciуn consistirб en un examen (escrito) presencial a final de cuatrimestre. La evaluaciуn serб coherente con los objetivos, contenidos y actividades realizadas durante el perнodo de aprendizaje, tanto en lo que se refiere a la parte presencial como a la parte on-line de la asignatura. El examen constarб, por lo tanto, de dos partes: una referida al contenido impartido en la plataforma virtual y otra referida al contenido impartido de manera presencial. Cada una de estas dos partes supondrб el 50% de la nota final. Los ejercicios serбn similares a los realizados durante el curso (multiple choice questions, fill-in-the-gaps, matching, ejercicios de gramбtica, redacciуn/resumen, comprensiуn de textos, listening etc.) La fecha oficial del examen no se modificarб salvo en aquellos casos en los que exista incompatibilidad de dнa y hora con otro examen o fuerza mayor debidamente justificada. En el primer caso se deberб presentar justificaciуn mediante fotocopia de la matrнcula en la asignatura que es objeto de incompatibilidad. Los estudiantes que se encuentren en esta situaciуn deberбn comunicarlo a los profesores antes del 30 de marzo. __B_I_B_L_I_O__G_R__A_F_Н_A__B_Б__S_IC__A___________________________________________________________________________ Garner, B. 2001. Legal writing in plain English : a text with exercices. Chicago/London: University of Chicago Press. Kearns, M. 2007. Legal English. Madrid: Colex Krois-Lindner, A. and J. Day. 2008. Introduction to international legal English: a course for classroom or self-study use. Cambridge : Cambridge University Press
187
Programas 2010/2011 Riley, A. 2004. English for law. Longman. DICCIONARIOS Alcaraz Varу, E. 2007. Diccionario de tйrminos jurнdicos : inglйs-espaсol, Spanish-English. 10Є ed. Barcelona : Ariel. Ramos Bossini, F. 2005. Diccionario bilingьe de terminologнa jurнdica : inglйs-espaсol/espaсol-inglйs = bilingual dictionary of legal terms : English-Spanish/Spanish-English. Granada : Comares. [Referencias bibliogrбficas adicionales para cada tema se facilitarбn a travйs de WebCT] Profesor/Profesores responsables: Lorena Pйrez Hernбndez 188
Programas 2010/2011
8880038
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
8880038 INGLЙS JURНDICO II
Titulaciуn Libre elecciуn
Tipo de Asignatura Le
Curso
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Teуricos 3
Prбcticos Aula 3
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ This course aims to increase students confidence in their understanding of Anglo-American legal terminology and how it is used, enabling them to formulate legal documents in English. The idea is to offer preparation for students wishing to enter professional activities involving the use of Legal English. It is not necessary to have a proficiency level in English but students are required to have fulfilled the Universitys English language Selectividad requirement. Although an emphasis will be laid on the written skills, the students will also be able to practice their English through the exchange of ideas in class. Obvious grammatical problems will also be dealt both as they arise in class and with the realization of the on-line assignments too. We will also promote access to English-language legal websites. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ I. LINGUISTICS TRAITS OF LEGAL ENGLISH 1.1 The legal vocabulary 1.2. The morphosyntax of English 1.3. The Semantics of Legal English II. TYPOLOGY OF LEGAL TEXTS 2.1. Acts, Statutes, Bills, Statutory Instruments 2..2. Claim Forms, Writ of Summons, Claim, Pleading, Judgment, Appeal 2.3. Law reports, Text books, Case books. III. CIVIL LAW 3.1. Country courts and the High Court of Justice 3.2. Law of tort IV. INTERNATIONAL LAW 4.1. Community Law 4.2. The European Court 4.4. Multilateral agreements V. BUSINESS LAW 5.1. Brand Names 5.2. Licences 5.3. Fraud 5.4. Liability 5.5. Bankruptcy VI. COMPANY LAW 6.1. Types of companies 6.2. Mergers and takeovers VII. CONTRACT LAW 7.1. Types of contracts 7.2. The structure of a contract
189
Programas 2010/2011 7.3. Breach of contract and remedies 7.4. Contractual language __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Final written test will be designed to measure the essential skills. It will include different sections: reading comprehension , exercises , translation, and vocabulary section. Grading in the course will be based on the exam, class participation, and the supplementary on-line work. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ A concise Dictionary of Law. Oxford Reference, 2nd edition. Longman. Harlow, Essex, (1991) ALCARAZ VARO, E. (1994) El inglйs jurнdico . Ariel . ALCARAZ VARO, E.& HUGHES, B. (1991) Diccionario de tйrminos jurнdicos . Ariel Derecho.Barcelona. BORJA ALBI A. (2000) El texto jurнdico inglйs y su traducciуn al espaсol.Ariel BRADGATE, R.& SAVAGE, N. (1991) Commercial Law. Butterworths. London Collins Cobuild English Language Dictionary. Collins Birmingham International Language Database. Collins. London (1987) DOONAN, E. (1995) Essential legal skills: drafting. London: Cavendish Publishing. DWORSKY,A.L: (1992) The little book on legal writing. (2nd ed.) Littleton. CO:F.B. Rothman and Co. FERNБNDEZ Y SUБREZ, R.L.& ALMENDБREZ, I. ( 1994) A guide to legal English. Inglйs para juristas. Sintйsis, Madrid. GARNER B.A. (2001) Legal writing in Plain English. Chicago University Press. HARRIS, M. A. (1997) Legal writing: principles of juriography. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall. LEE, D.S., HALL, C., & HURLEY, m. (1999) American legal English: using language in legal context. Ann Arbor, MI: The University of Michigan Press. MOYANO PRADOS, E. (1996) Legal English. Interglossa Osborns Concise Law Dictionary, (1983) 7th edition by R.Bird. Sweet & Maxwell. London. PENNINGTON, R.R. (1991) Company Law, 6th Edition. Butterworths. London. RAMOS BOSSINI, F & GLEESON M.. (2002) Diccionario bilingьe de terminologнa jurнdica: inglйs- espaсol/espaсol-inglйs. RILEY, A. (1999) English for Law (2nd ed, ) London: Macmillan. RUSSELL, F. & LOCKE, C. (1992) English Law and Language. Cassell Publishers Ltd. London . SMITH, T. (2000) Market leader. Business Law. Longman. WOJCIK,M. (1998) Introduction to legal English: an introduction to legal terminology, reasoning, and writing in plain English. Washington D.C.: International Law Institute. Profesor/Profesores Responsables: 190
Programas 2010/2011
8880039
Cуdigo
Descripciуn
8880039 INTRODUCCIУN A LA TRADUCCIУN Y EDICIУN DE TEXTOS EN INGLЙS ESPECНFICO
Titulaciуn Libre elecciуn
Departamento Filologнas Modernas
Tipo de Asignatura Le
Curso
Cuatrimestre 2
Crйditos 6
Teуricos 2
Prбcticos Aula 4
Prбcticos Laboratorio
__O__B_J__E_T__IV__O__S____________________________________________________________________________________ Esta asignatura tiene como objetivo introducir al estudiante en las tйcnicas de la gestiуn y producciуn de documentos, principalmente en lo que se refiere a la creaciуn de textos nuevos encuadrados en disciplinas bien identificadas y a la traducciуn entre inglйs y espaсol de textos de ese mismo carбcter. Sin embargo, el planteamiento incluye tйcnicas relativas al mantenimiento de una base de datos terminolуgica y al logro de los objetivos de consistencia transdocumental. __P__R_O__G__R_A__M__A__T_E__У__R_I_C_O___Y__P_R__Б_C__T_I_C__A_S__D__E__A__U_L__A_______________________________________________ Se ofrece a continuaciуn una lista de temas que se tratarбn en el curso, los cuales, pese a su posible carga teуrica, se orientarбn siempre a su aplicaciуn prбctica. 1) El problema. 2) El diccionario electrуnico. 3) Bases de datos terminolуgicas. Bases de datos y corpora textuales 4) Escritura asistida. Herramientas. 5) Coherencia textual e intertextual. 6) Herramientas del traductor. 7) Ediciуn y postediciуn 8) Tнtulos, Нndices analнticos, sumarios, bibliografнas. 9) Gestiуn del conocimiento. 10) Interacciуn con otros profesionales. La prбctica se centrarб no sуlo en la redacciуn, ediciуn, traducciуn o revisiуn de la traducciуn, sino tambiйn en informar acerca de los recursos y herramientas existentes para estos fines. Al alumno se le facilitarб el conocimiento de las principales herramientas informбticas para la traducciуn y la gestiуn terminolуgica y se practicara con aquellas aplicaciones libres disponibles. __S__IS__T_E__M_A___Y__C_R__I_T_E_R__I_O_S__D__E__E__V_A__L_U__A_C__I_У_N______________________________________________________ Participaciуn activa en las clases presenciales y en las actividades online. Dos trabajos escritos individuales sobre temas previamente acordados con el profesor. De estos dos trabajos escrito, el primero se centrarб en cuestiones terminolуgicas y el segundo, en cuestiones relativas a la tipologнa textual y documental. __B__IB__L_I_O__G__R_A__F_Н_A__B__Б_S__IC__A________________________________________________________________________ Se comunicarб oportunamente, aunque dado el carбcter prбctico de la asignatura y que el trabajo de cada alumno se perfilarб de acuerdo con su titulaciуn de procedencia, ha de quedar claro que cada cual trabajarб preferentemente con materiales y textos de su propio бmbito acadйmico. Profesor/Profesores Responsables:
191

B BÁSICA

File: programa-terico-y-prcticas-de-aula.pdf
Title: Microsoft Word - Programas 2010_2011.doc
Author: B BÁSICA
Author: auxdfm
Published: Thu Aug 19 12:59:07 2010
Pages: 192
File size: 1.34 Mb

Copyright © 2018 doc.uments.com